Electrical MEP Specs

CH C
PROJECT
ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

PROPOSED BUILDING (G+4+R)
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared by
April , 2014
SPECIFICATIONS ELEC/SPEC.16000.
SECTION DESCRIPTION
16000 SCOPE AND EXTENT OF WORKS

16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS
16110 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS FOR WIRING AND CABLING CONDUITS,
TRUNKING, TRAYS, LADDERS, DUCTS AND UNDER FLOOR TRUNKING
16123 LOW VOLATGE CABLES, WIRES AND ACCESSORIES
16124‐1 DU GUIDELINES
16124‐2 TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV SYSTEMS
16141 WIRING ACCESSORIES
16170 EARTHING SYSTEM
16411 LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL
16426 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR, MAIN, SUB‐MAIN AND FINAL
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, ISOLATORS AND LOAD‐BREAK SWITCHES
16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
16511 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
16721‐16770 ANOLOGUE ADDRESSABLE VOICE INTEGRATED FIRE DETECTION AND
ALARM SYSTEM
16780 CENTRALLY MONITORED SELF CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SYSTEM
16781 MASTER DIGITAL SATELLITE AND TERRRESTRIAL ANTENNAE
SYSTEM
16782 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION AND VIDEO SECURITY SURVEILLANCE
SYSTEM
16782‐1 INTERCOM SYSTEM DIGITAL AUDIO INTERCOM
16783 SOLAR WATER HEATER SYSTEM
VENDOR LIST
File: ELECSPEC16000.doc Page 1 of 1

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS
SECTION 16000
SCOPE AND EXTENT OF WORKS
1. SCOPE OF WORKS
1.1 The enclosed Specifications cover the Electrical Installation works for the
project design is proposed to be “ B+G+4 Residential with Retail Building”
for Rajesh Building .
1.2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, delivery to site, installation,
commissioning and testing of the various electrical systems outlined briefly below
and as described in detail in the relevant Specifications and drawings.
1.3. Prior to submitting his offer, the Contractor shall be required to visit the site for
familiarization with all site conditions and scope of works.
1.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing all workshop drawings for each
electrical system and submit to the Engineer for his study, comments and
subsequent approval.
1.5. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals for all workshop
drawings from respective statutory authorities prior to commencing execution of
any works.
1.6. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer for all equipment and
materials at an early date to enable placing of orders in good time. Contractor
shall be responsible for applying, coordinating and obtaining/ issuing of all
permits and necessary NOC’s from the local authorities (DM, DEWA, Etisalat,
DU, RTA, Dubai Police, etc).
1.7. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with Dubai Electricity and
Water Authority (DEWA) for making all necessary arrangements for provision of
H.T. electricity supply to the sub-station, and thence to respective Main L.V.
Electrical room for connection to the Main distribution board, MDB. All costs,
charges and fees required by the statutory authorities shall be included in his
offer, except the power connection charges, which shall be paid by the Client.
1.8. Contractor shall be responsible to comply with Dubai Municipality and DEWA
Green Building Regulations.
2. EXTENT OF WORKS
The Electrical Installation works shall include the supply, installation, testing,
connecting and putting into satisfactory and safe service the following in compliance
with details in relevant drawings, Specifications, Schedules of Luminaries, Schedule
of equipment and accessories, and Load Schedules for various distribution boards:
2.1. Main L.V. ACB/MCCB Distribution Board, designated as MDB shall be form 4
Type 6, complete with kilo-watt-hour meter, ammeters, voltmeter/selector
switches, cable glands, other necessary accessories etc. The MDB shall be
complete with Power Factor Correcting Panel, designated as PFCP, housed in an
independent enclosure, which shall not form an integral part of the MDB.

Scope and Extent of Works
2.2. All Sub-main L.V. MCCB Distribution Boards designated SMDBs.
2.3. All Final TPN MCB Distribution Boards designated DBs.
2.4. All heavy-duty isolators constructed to protection grade IP65.
2.5. All L.V. cabling between MDBs and SMDBs, and between SMDBs and DBs,
isolators for fire fighting and other pumps, lifts, A/C Condensing Units and
other similar equipment, all in compliance with details in drawings.
2.6. All L.V. cabling/wiring between MCB boards and respective outlet points
associated with internal and external lighting points, exhaust fans, general
purpose socket-outlets, hand dryers, isolators etc., all in strict compliance with
details in drawings and load schedules for respective boards.
2.7. All internal and external lighting points and respective fixtures.
2.8. All Emergency and Exit lighting points and respective fixtures.
2.9. All single gang, multigang and two-way lighting switches, other SP and DP
switches; timer activated contactor operated multi-gang switch assembly units
with manual override facility for control of external lighting and roof
projection lighting circuits.
2.10. All Exhaust fans.
2.11. All recessed domestic type general purpose 13A single and twin switched
socket outlets in offices and similar areas.
2.12. All single and twin surface mounted industrial type 13A switch socket outlets
to IP65 in external areas.
2.13. Fused connection units for connection to water heaters, hand dryers and
similar equipment.
2.14. Cord outlets for connection to exhaust fans.
2.15. For structured cabling voice and data system, only priority containment
system comprising individual conduits to each voice and data outlet from
respective Voice Data distributors, trays from main distributor to sub-main
distributor, all in coordination with and to the requirements of the specialist
sub-contractors who shall be responsible for supply and installation of all
structured cabling equipment, voice and data socket outlets and cabling.
2.16. 3 No. UPS units, UPS1 feeding SPN board DB-CT1 in ground floor Computer
and Telephone Room for lighting and small power circuits; UPS2 feeding
SPN board DB-CT2 in first floor Computer and Telephone Room for lighting
and small power circuits; UPS3 feeding SPN board DB-SEC in ground floor
Security Room for supply to socket outlets for all E.L.V. systems inclusive of
outlets for CCTV Cameras, Card Access System Magnetic Locks, Security
Panel, Fire Alarm Control Panels etc.
2.17. High quality, high performance integrated Security System comprising CCTV
and Card Access Control System complete with all necessary containment
system, components and accessories deemed essential for a safe and reliable
Security System.
2.18. Telephone system inclusive of PABX and complete with necessary external
and internal conduits with draw tapes/wires, wiring, line jack outlets, main and
sub-main distribution frames, junction boxes etc. all in strict compliance with
the current rules, regulations, requirements and recommendations of
ETISALAT.
2.19. State-of-the-art Analogue Soft Addressable Voice Integrated Fire Detection
and Alarm System, all in strict compliance with the current rules, regulations,
requirements and recommendations of the local Civil Defence Autority.

2.20. High quality high performance Satellite Master Antennae System for
integration with the structured cabling system.
2.21. High quality high performance intelligent lighting control system for control
of lighting circuits in respective public areas, Libraries, Multipurpose Halls
etc.
2.22. Complete earthing system, inclusive of clean earthing for Telecommunication
rooms.
2.23. Adequate and suitably sized uPVC conduits complete with draw wires for
incoming ETISALAT cables.
2.24. Adequate numbers and suitably dimensioned manholes for telephone and
electrical power cables.
2.25. Complete and satisfactory testing of all items of equipment and accessories for
each system described above.
END OF SECTION 16000

SECTION 16010
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS
1. GENERAL.
1.1 These Specifications cover the supply, delivery, storage, installation, connection,
testing and commissioning of all equipment and materials required for the
electrical installation works for the project, all in compliance with the General and
Particular Specifications and Drawings
1.2. Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall be required to visit the site to ascertain
limitations or constraints that may affect his works on site. In addition the
Contractor shall study the Specifications and tender design drawings in detail as
no variations shall be allowed due to lack of knowledge relating to site conditions
and drawings implications.
1.3. The General and Particular Specifications shall be read in conjunction with
the Contracts Documents and Tender drawings. In the event of any
discrepancies between the drawings and the Specifications, the drawings shall
be deemed correct for tendering purposes. The Contractor shall, however, be
required to draw attention to such discrepancies at the time of submitting his
offer.
1.4. All electrical installation works shall be carried out in strict compliance with
details in drawings, load schedules for distribution boards, Schedules of
equipment and materials, technical Specifications of equipment and materials,
and any other instructions issued by the Engineer.
1.5. All electrical installation works shall conform to the best principles of modern
practice and shall be carried out by fully competent tradesmen of appropriate
grades to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.6. All equipment and materials shall be installed to guarantee satisfactory
operation at specified parameters.
1.7. To avoid delays and to facilitate smooth running of the works, the Contractor
shall ensure that after receipt of all necessary approvals from the Engineer,
prompt orders for all items of equipment and materials shall be placed.
1.8. High quality brand new equipment and materials free from any flaws and
defects shall be used. Any equipment and material not accepted by the
Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
1.9. The Contractor shall ensure all equipment, accessories and components are of
appropriate protection grade for installation in various areas, taking into
account environmental considerations relating to dampness, sand, dust,
corrosion etc.
1.10. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all equipment, materials,
accessories and fittings proposed for installation in the project. The Contractor
shall submit Quality Inspection Plan for all items for Engineer’s study and
review.

General Requiremenst and Conditions
1.11. All equipment shall be manufactured by reputable manufacturers of
international repute with ISO 9001 accreditation. The manufacturers should
have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of respective items for at
least ten years, and their products have been used satisfactorily in similar
projects.
1.12. The Contractor shall submit original documents of origin of country of all
respective equipment and materials proposed for the project. In addition, Bill
of Lading of all the said items of equipment shall also be submitted.
2. STANDARDS AND CODES
All electrical materials and equipment used in electrical installation works shall
comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the relevant International
Electro-Technical Commission (IEC) publications, British Standards (BS), and
NFPA.
All electrical installation works shall be carried out in strict compliance with current
rules, regulations, requirements and recommendations of the following institutes and
statutory authorities:
a) Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) Wiring Regulations.

b) Wiring Regulations of the Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE), UK, now
published as BS7671:2001.
c) IEC Regulations for Electrical Installations in Buildings, publication IEC 364.
d) Local ETISALAT Office for all works related to Telephone and Structured
Cabling Systems.
e) Local Civil Defence Authority for all works related to Fire Detection and
Alarm System.
f) Dubai Municipality, DEWA and Green Building Regulation.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
All electrical equipment, materials, apparatus, accessories and fittings used in the
installations shall be suitable for use in the climatic conditions prevalent in Ajman as
detailed below :
a) Maximum ambient temperature : 55 degrees C (to be reviewed).

b) Relative humidity : 95%
4. ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND SERVICE CONDITIONS
All electrical equipment, materials, apparatus, accessories and fittings used in the
installations shall be designed and manufactured to operate safely and continuously in
the electricity supply system provided by DEWA with the following characteristics:
Voltage : 380V +/- 5%, 3 phase, 4-wire

Frequency : 50 Hz +/- 2%
Neutral : solidly earthed, TNT system

Fault level : 20 MVA, supplied from a 1000 kVA transformer

30 MVA, supplied from a 1500 kVA transformer
Fault duration : 1 second.
5. STATUTORY APPROVALS, FEES AND INSPECTION
5.1. The Contractor shall coordinate with DEWA to obtain all relevant information,
data and instructions pertaining to his parts of the works.
5.2. The Contractor shall coordinate with DEWA to make all necessary arrangements
for the supply and installation of all high-voltage equipment for connection of
electricity supply for the project.
5.3. The contractor shall coordinate with ETISALAT to obtain all relevant
information, data and instructions pertaining to telephone, voice and data
system installation works.
5.4. The Contractor shall coordinate with the local Civil Defense Authority to
obtain all relevant information, data and instructions pertaining to installation
works for Fire Detection and Alarm system.
5.5. Prior to commencement of any installation works, the Contractor shall submit
specified number of copies of drawings to relevant authorities for checking,
comments and approval. Any modifications or additional requirements by the
relevant authority shall be brought forthwith to the attention of the Engineer
for further action and compliance.
5.6. To avoid unnecessary delays, the Contractor shall arrange for inspection of
works by the relevant authorities on an on-going basis during the course of
works.
5.7. On completion of works, final approval certificates from each statutory
authority shall be submitted to the Engineer for handing over to the Client.
5.8. The Contractor shall pay all attendance and other charges to the relevant
authorities.
6. CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES AND SUPPLIERS.
6.1. The contractor shall coordinate with the plumbing works sub-contractor to
ascertain locations and routes of all water and drainage pipes to ensure
sufficient and safe clearances are maintained between these and electrical
services in all areas.
6.2. The ratings of isolators for water pumps, fire fighting pumps, booster pumps, A.C.
Condensing Units, Extract Fans, lifts, and other electrically operated equipment
have been stipulated after coordination at the design stage with the Plumbing and
Mechanical Engineers. However, the Contractor shall be required to coordinate
with the concerned sub-contractors and manufacturers of proposed equipment and
supply and install suitable isolators of correct ratings to match requirements of
equipment finally selected for installation.
6.3. The Contractor shall coordinate with the suppliers and installers of all
specialist equipment inclusive of false ceilings; A.C. equipment and duct
work; Fire Detection and Alarm System; Closed Circuit TV vigilance system ;
Structured Cabling System for voice, data and TV Systems; P.A. system,
Access Control Security System, Telephone System installation etc. to
facilitate, wherever applicable, correct and satisfactory installation of
containment network comprising conduits, trunking, trays etc. for points
associated with the respective systems.

6.4. Layout of A.C. grills, fire alarm detectors, sound system speakers, emergency
lighting luminaires, indoor and outdoor CCTV cameras, Access Conrol
Security System clearances above false ceilings etc. shall be fully coordinated
with other trades for proper and satisfactory siting of lighting fixtures in the
false ceilings.
6.5. Prior to commencement of any works, the Contractor shall liase with all other
sub-contractors for all services and submit co-ordinated drawings to the
Engineer for his study, comments and final approval.
6.6. The Contractor shall include in his tender all necessary expenses, if any, or
providing services to other specialist sub-contractors.
7. TENDER DRAWINGS AND POSITIONS OF FITTINGS.
7.1. Approximate locations of various items of electrical equipment inclusive of

wiring accessories, lighting luminaires, isolators, distribution boards, panels
and components of Fire Detection and Alarm system, Structured Cabling
System, Telephone System, CCTV System, P.A. System, Access Control
Security System etc. indicated in the drawings shall be assumed to be
correct for tendering purposes only, and are intended to indicate general
requirements and arrangement of aforementioned equipment and accessories.
Locations of items of electrical equipment may be changed on site to comply
with furniture layout and/or architectural requirements.
7.2. The electrical design drawings do not intend to show architectural, structural,
fabrication or installation details. For accurate dimensions refer to architectural
and structural drawings. Elevations for all services shall be verified prior to
commencement of any electrical installation works.
8. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
8.1. Four sets of tender drawings for all electrical works shall be provided to the
Contractor. Any necessary design modifications shall be in the form of design
notes and / or sketches as directed by the Engineer.
8.2. To facilitate satisfactory execution of electrical installation works and to avoid
any conflict with other trades and services, the Contractor shall be responsible
for preparing all relevant coordinated construction drawings.
8.3. The Contractor shall submit, within thirty days of Engineer’s instructions for
commencement of works, three copies of drawings indicating dimensioned
details of sleeves, openings, holes, chases etc. required in the structure; piping
and equipment in shafts; piping and equipment in mechanical and plant rooms
and other critical areas; equipment foundations; trenches; anchors; inertia
slabs etc. to be provided by others to enable him to fulfil his part of the works.
8.4. Transparencies and four sets of printed copies of all coordinated construction
drawings approved and stamped by all other trades shall be submitted to the
Engineer.

9. WORKING AND “AS FITTED “ DRAWINGS AND OPERATING MAUALS
9.1. During the course of the works the contractor shall maintain a fully detailed
record of all changes to the Tender Drawings as true record of actual
installations.
9.2. The drawings shall show the complete electrical installation works of all
electrical systems within and external to the building, inclusive of the type,
cross- sectional areas and runs/lengths of all L.V. cables, the precise locations
of all cables which may be buried within the structure, and those sections of
any external cables which are buried directly in the ground.
9.3. The locations and depths of all underground cables and uPVC conduits for
incoming ETISALAT cables at the various entry points shall also be clearly
indicated.
9.4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the accuracy of dimensions of all
equipment with respect to space available, for accessibility of equipment for
maintenance and service, and for compliance with the rules, regulations,
requirements and recommendations of the statutory authorities.
9.5. Preparation and submission of drawings is subject to Contractual obligations
and any delay shall be subject to penalties and other remedies as determined by
the Engineer.
9.6. Within one month of completion of the installations, the Contractor shall
provide 3 No. complete sets of the following record drawings for all above
mentioned systems, as detailed below, for Engineers study, comments and final
approval :
i) General arrangement of all electrical services “ AS FITTED”, to scale

not less than 1:100 metric.
ii) Details of all items of plant and equipment including name and address
of respective manufacturer, type and model, serial number, duty, rating
and any other pertinent information.
iii) Single line schematic drawings to a scale not less than 1:100 metric,
indicating position of all distribution boards, isolators, switches, control
panels etc. with relevant notes describing their functions.
9.7. After obtaining approval in writing for the drawings, the Contractor shall
provide one negative and two prints of each drawing together with two bound
sets of all manuals and operating instructions to the Engineer for issuing these
to the Client.
10. PERSONNEL TRAINING
10.1. Prior to acceptance of the works, the Contractor shall be required to train and
instruct Client’s personnel in the correct use, operation and supervision of
Fire Detection and Alarm System, Sound System, CCTV System and any
other system installed in the building.
10.2. Prior to acceptance of the works, the Contractor shall also be required to
demonstrate and explain to the client’s personnel the correct operation of all
items of switchgear and the starting, running and stopping of all item of
mechanical plant installed in the building.

10.3. The cost of the training programme shall be deemed to be included in the
Contract price.
10.4. The supplier shall be required to provide operating manuals to supplement the
training courses.
11. ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
11.1. As a guide to the quality of workmanship required, names of three

manufacturers together with technical details and, wherever applicable,
catalogue number shall generally be specified for each item in the Schedule of
Luminaires, Equipment and Materials.
11.2. Client’s list of recommended and preferred manufacturers for lighting
fixtures, wiring accessories, switchgear, cables, busbar ducts and other
relevant equipment, materials and System shall be provided.
11.3. Any alternative offered shall be equivalent or better in quality than those
specified, and shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to placing
order or installing in the project.
12. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
12.1. The Contractor shall provide necessary assistance and facilities to the Engineer
to inspect all materials and equipment at works on site during the progress of
the works.
12.2. The Contractor shall provide, free of charge, all necessary labour, materials,
testing equipment and measuring instruments which may be required to carry
out the various tests on the installations in compliance with the
recommendations of the relevant statutory authorities and as directed by the
Engineer.
12.3 The Contractor shall give fourteen days notice before the installation is ready
for inspection and testing. Subject to the Engineer’s agreement, the Contractor
may proceed with the tests and forward three certified copies of the results
obtained to the Engineer. If the results are found satisfactory in every respect,
the installation shall be accepted, but such acceptance shall be without any
prejudice to any claims in respect of any defects which may develop during the
guarantee period for maintenance.
12.4. To facilitate progress of works it may be necessary to test sections of works
separately.
12.5. Tests shall be repeated, within reasonable time and without extra charges, on
any sections of the installations which have failed the tests.
12.6. In case where sections of works are located above false ceilings, the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer that the works are ready for inspection and testing.
No enclosures shall be installed until inspection and testing have been
completed.
12.7. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of electrical connections
to all equipment prior to switching on the supply for their operation.
12.8. After connection of electricity supply, the Contractor shall commission all
sections of the installations to demonstrate to the Engineer the satisfactory and
correct operation of all items of installations.

13. ELECTRICAL TESTS.
13.1. On completion of the installations and prior to its being made “alive” for service, the
Contractor shall carry out the recommended electrical tests, on all sections of the
works in the presence of the Engineer and the representative of the Federal
Electricity and Water Authority.
13.2. All tests shall be carried out in strict compliance with the requirements and
recommendations of the 16th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations
(BS7671:2001) and the current Wiring Regulations of DEWA.
13.2. Electrical Tests shall include the following :
i) Insulation resistance tests between conductors, and between conductors

and earth.
ii) Earth continuity tests.
iii) Earth resistance measurements.
iv) Verification of polarity.
v) Ring circuit continuity tests.
vi) Operational tests on all Residual Current Circuit Breakers.
vii) Operational tests on all equipment and relays.
14. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING.
The Contractor shall provide maintenance, servicing and replacement of all defective
parts during the maintenance guarantee period from the date of handing over the
project.
15. SAMPLES.
The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials, fittings and fixtures to the
Engineer and obtain his written approval prior to placing order or using or installing
these in any part of the works.
16. SPARE PARTS.
In accordance with respective manufacturer’s recommendations, the contractor shall

provide, as part of the Contract, all special tools required for equipment maintenance
together with list of spare parts deemed essential for two years, together with
individual prices of all items of spares.
17. NOTICES.
In each electrical room the following Notices relating to important instructions

and information shall be provided and hung in all electrical rooms :
i) The instructions for the treatment of electric shock, in Arabic and English
languages, mounted on a steel frame and screwed to the wall.

ii) A schematic diagram of the switchgear located in the room together with a
complete single line schematic drawing of the complete electrical distribution
system, framed and mounted on the wall.
18. LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION MARKS.
All equipment and apparatus shall be permanently marked with the manufacturer’s
name, and shall also be identified by engraved labels to indicate the services
controlled or to identify individual apparatus or equipment. Labels shall be securely
fixed to the front cover of equipment in an approved manner.
19. NOTES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS.
19.1. Each Final MCB Distribution Board shall be sectionalized as indicated in

respective load schedules in compliance with DEWA’s requirements.
19.2. Multigang lighting control switches incorporating more than one phase shall
be equipped with phase barriers.
19.3. Lighting control switches shall be adequately rated to control respective
inductive loads.
19.4. Each hand dryer or hair dryer shall be supplied via a connection unit and shall
be controlled by a 20A DP switch with neon indicator.
19.5. Final locations of all wiring accessories shall be determined in coordination
with Architect’s instructions and in compliance with final furniture and
equipment layouts.
19.6. All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with details in load
schedules of respective final MCB distribution boards.
19.7. Voltage drops to the farthest point of electrical supply shall not exceed 2.5%
of DEWA’s declared nominal voltage.
19.8. All isolators shall be designed for heavy-duty service and shall comply with
degree of protection IP55 for internal and IP65 for external installations. All
isolators supplying motoring circuits shall conform with the requirements of
type AC23.
19.9. Where cables, bus-ducts, cable trays, trunking, ladders, conduits etc. pass
through fire rated floors, walk or roof, the Contractor shall provide internal and
external fire sealant. For non-fire rated locations, the silicon sealants shall be
used.

SECTION - 16110
CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS FOR WIRING AND CABLING
CONDUITS, TRUNKING, TRAYS, LADDERS, DUCTS AND UNDER
FLOOR TRUNKING
The Contractor shall supply and install a complete network of containment system
comprising conduits, underfloor trunking, cable trunking, trays, ladders and duct works in
various area of the premises for satisfactory, correct, orderly and segregated distribution of
wiring and cabling for electrical power, voice, data and other ELV services.
1. GENERAL GUIDELINES
1.1. All conduits, trunking, trays etc. shall be arranged in a neat and inconspicuous
manner, and each system shall be completely assembled, inspected and tested
prior to cables/wiring being drawn in them.
1.2. All works shall be carried out in strict compliance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer and with guidelines and recommendations in BS
7671:2001, which incorporates the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations.
1.3. Notional routes of cables and other related instructions shall be indicated in
the drawings. However, prior to commencement of any parts of the works, the
Contractor shall be required to submit, for Engineer’s study and approval, two
prints of comprehensive working drawings indicating proposed routes of
conduits, trays, trunking, trays, ladders and ducts together with all relevant
dimensional details.
1.4. All containment systems shall be supported and secured to the building fabric
in a manner to ensure these are fully protected and have no load or stresses
other than the loads of wiring and cabling they are designed to carry.
1.5. All accessories, fittings and components shall be of same manufacture as for
respective items of containment system.
2. INSTRUCTIONS AND GUIDELINES FOR CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS
2.1. No conduits of diameter smaller than 20 mm shall be used.

2.2. All conduits, throughout the installations, shall be of sufficiently large cross-
sectional area and shall be arranged, with sufficient number of strategically
located draw-in boxes, to allow easy drawing of any or all the cables. Care
shall be exercised to ensure that the number of wires drawn in a conduit,
relative to its diameter, does not exceed the number stipulated in the Wiring

Containment Systems for Wiring and Cabling
Conduits , Trunking, Trays, Ladders
Regulations BS 7671:2001. Should these differ in any way with the
regulations of the Dubai Electricity Supply Authority, the requirements of the
latter shall be adhered to.
2.3. All conduits shall be run in a manner to facilitate self-draining to outlet
boxes. Each length of conduit shall be cleaned and dried with the help of a
swab drawn through its length, and all boxes shall be cleaned to remove
moisture prior to installing cables.
2.4. Conduit bends shall be made with the bore of the tube remaining full and free
throughout and all conduits shall be perfectly smooth inside and outside, and
free from any burrs and sharp corners. Bends shall be made without heating
the conduits and by using approved type of bending machine or bending
block to give results consistent with the best grade of craftsmanship.
2.5. No more than two right angle bends shall be permitted between draw-in
boxes. No diagonal runs of conduits shall be allowed on the walls of
structure. Conduits concealed in the ceiling slab shall run parallel to walls
and beams, and those concealed in walls shall be run vertical and/or
horizontal.
2.6. All conduits cast in concrete or laid in floor screeds shall be effectively
secured, positioned and protected against mechanical damage, ingress of
concrete etc. Allowance shall be made for thermal expansion and contraction
of straight runs of conduits.
2.7. Where conduits run parallel to one another, the distance between adjacent
conduits shall not be less than 15 mm. At junction of multi-run of conduits,
rectangular adaptor boxes having internal dimensions not less than 150 x 100
x 50 mm, shall be used. Maximum of 3 Nos. 20 mm diameter and a
maximum of 2 nos. 20 mm diameter conduits shall enter the longer and
shorter sides of the boxes respectively. For more or larger sized conduits,
larger boxes of appropriate sizes shall be used.
2.8. All conduits embedded in walls shall be fully recessed to permit a minimum
thickness of 15 mm plaster or other finish to be obtained. Ceiling boxes for
lighting fixtures shall be brought flush with the ceiling plaster or finish. The
mounting boxes for flush type switches, socket outlets etc. shall be recessed
squaring into the wall structure until the front edge is level with the finished
surface of the plaster or other finish.
2.9. Conduits shall be terminated in accessories, distribution boards etc. either by
being screwed into the tapped spouts or holes where such are provided, or by
locking into clearance holes by means of couplers and smooth bore
hexagonal male bushes. Connections between the conduits and box with
clearance holes shall, in addition, be filled with a brass compression washer
between the box and the coupling with no exposed thread.
2.10. Under no circumstances holes shall be drilled in any structural steel or
prestressed concrete without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
2.11. Adaptable switch and socket-outlet boxes in 1-gang and 2-gang configuration
shall be constructed of pre-coated galvanized steel complying with the
requirements of BS 4662:1970. These shall be complete with adjustable lugs,
brass earth terminals, oval knock-outs, rubber grommets etc.
2.12. Separate and dedicated conduits shall be installed for lighting, small power,
telephone, structured cabling and other ELV systems.

2.13. The Contractor shall be required to submit calculations to justify the
proposed dimensions of the containment system in compliance with the
space factors recommended by IEE Wiring Regulations and by DEWA.
In general, space factor for conduits shall be 0.45 and space factor for
trunking and ladders shall be 0.4.
2.14. Conduits installed on surface of walls and ceilings shall be supported along
their entire runs by saddlers that shall be spaced in compliance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
2.15. Conduits passing through water-proof membranes shall be equipped with 50
mm thick collars of appropriate thickness welded all around at membrane
level, with the membrane pressed over the collars. After installation of
conduits, the sleeves shall be filled with approved water tight sealant.
3. PVC CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES
3.1. All PVC conduits shall be high-impact, rigid and heavy gauge complying
with the requirements of BS EN 50086-1:1994. Fittings and accessories shall
be of same manufacture as the conduits. Minimum thickness of walls
corresponding to respective outside diameter of conduits shall be as follows :
OUTSIDE DIAMETER WALL THICKNESS
(mm) (mm)
20 1.8
25 1.9
32 2.5
38 2.5
3.2. All conduits shall be unthreaded, slip-fit and push-on type. Unless otherwise
specified only plain couplers shall be used. All joints shall be made with
weather-proof adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3. Terminations in metal equipment and accessories with a tapped entry shall
employ flanged couplings locked to the metal case with smooth bore
brass/PVC bushes.
3.4. At all expansion joints in the structure, expansion couplers shall be installed.
3.5. Draw-in boxes and switch mounting boxes shall be made of PVC and shall be
equipped with earth terminals.
3.6. Wherever necessary, approved type of flexible conduits and adaptors maybe
used.
3.7. Spacing of conduits runs from other services shall be the following minimum
values:
i) Cold water : 50 mm
ii) Hot water : 250 mm
iii) Air ducts : 20 mm
4. GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES.
4.1. All metal conduits shall be heavy gauge welded screwed steel tubing
complying with the requirements of BS 4568:PART 1:1970, and shall be
heavily galvanized both inside and outside throughout their entire lengths.

All conduit fittings and accessories shall be finished to the same
classification of protection as for the conduits.
4.2. All conduits shall be fixed in approved manner by means of crampets,
saddles, spacer bar saddles, cast distance saddles, cadmium plated steel
screws, bolts, nuts etc. all complying with the requirements of BS 4568:
PART 2:1970.
4.3. All conduits shall be threaded so that the ends of the conduits butt close
together in conduit coupling. Lock nuts shall be thoroughly coated with red
lead after installation.
4.4. All conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous and shall be
effectively bonded and earthed. Earth connections and bonding to conduits
shall be by means of copper tape or copper earth wire and earthing clamps
complying with BS 951:1999. Where the conduit makes contact with
structural steel, an efficient and permanent bond shall be made between the
conduit and metal work.
4.5. All conduit boxes shall be constructed of malleable iron or pressed steel and
shall have the same classification for protection as for the conduit. Where
they do not serve as outlets, they shall be fitted with lids secured with brass
screws. Earthing terminals shall be provided in all outlet boxes.
4.6. On completion of installations, the conduits shall be checked and all
imperfections shall be made good. Rust, minor damage and exposed threads
in conduit runs installed on the surfaces shall be painted with two coats of
Zinc Chromate paint and finished with approved air drying metallic paint.
Conduits concealed in the building structure shall be painted with two coats
of air drying red lead paint. The paints shall be applied immediately after the
completion of conduit installation.
4.7. Wherever there is likely to be excessive condensation, boxes shall be filled
with suitable plastic compound approved by the Engineer.
4.8. At all expansion joints in the structure an approved type of flexible sliding
connection shall be provided in every run of conduit to take up any
expansion or contraction of the conduits under service conditions. Bonding
across the joint shall be maintained by separate circuit protective conductor.
4.9. All conduit runs shall have adequate clearances between them and all other
service lines.
4.10. To facilitate movement between cabling and isolators for equipment, flexible
conduit tubing and adaptors complying with the requirements of BS 731-
1:1952 shall generally be used for housing the cables. For such connections
approved type of solid bronze adaptors with standard thread for flexible
conduits shall be used.
5. PVC TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS
5.1. Rigid heavy gauge PVC trunking of approved manufacture may be used in
lieu of multiple conduit runs. The trunking shall be rigidly supported along
their entire lengths at intervals not exceeding 1.25 m. All fixings shall be
carried out with cadmium plated steel screws.
5.2. All PVC trunking, lids, fittings and accessories shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4678-4:1982.

5.3. The installation of PVC trunking shall be carried out in strict compliance with
the recommendations of the manufacturer.
5.4. Allowances shall be made for expansion of the trunking by using washers at
all fixing points.
5.5. Separate circuit protective conductors shall be used throughout the system for
earthing purposes.
5.6. All jointing shall be carried out using vinyl cement glue in compliance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. GALVANIZED STEEL TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS
6.1. Heavy gauge galvanized sheet steel trunking of approved manufacture and of
minimum thickness 1.6 mm may be used in lieu of multiple conduit runs. The
trunking shall be rigidly supported along their entire lengths at intervals not
exceeding 1 m. On horizontal runs the lid or cover plates shall always face
upwards.
6.2. All galvanized steel surface trunking, fittings, bends, tees, cable retainers,
cable separators, reducers, supports and other accessories shall comply with
the requirements of BS 4678-1:1971. These shall be rust-proof and shall be
complete with external fixing lugs. Site fabricated accessories shall not be
allowed under any circumstances.
6.3. The lids or access plates shall be removable in easily-handled sections over
the entire length of straight runs of trunkings. Overlapping collar sections or
other similar approved linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction
of adjacent sections of the trunking.
6.4. All fittings and accessories shall be installed to ensure there are no sharp
edges, projecting screw threads or similar points within the trunking that may
result in damage to the cables.
6.5. All under-floor steel trunking shall comply with the requirements of BS
4678-2:1973. These shall be rust-proof and shall be complete with external
fixing lugs.
6.6. Thickness of steel sheets for different sizes shall be as follows :
i) Sizes up to and including 50 x 50 mm 20 SWG
ii) Sizes from 50 x 50 mm to 75 x 75 mm 18 SWG
iii) Sizes from 75 x 75 mm to 225 x 150 mm 16 SWG
6.7. Lengths of trunking shall be efficiently bonded to each other using strip
copper links not less than 12 mm x 2 mm and fixed with brass nuts and bolts
and serrated washers. All lengths shall be connected by “Fish Plate”
connectors. All trunking shall be supplied with cable retaining straps at
intervals of 1 m.
6.8. Trunking run horizontally shall be provided with cable separators with
insulated pins at 1 m intervals. Trunking run vertically shall be provided with
a cable support unit with insulated pins at 3 m intervals.
6.9. Where trunking passes through floors and walls, fibreglass or an approved
ceramic fibre packing shall be fixed into trunking to form effective fire
barrier.
6.10. Under no circumstances cutting and bending of trunking to form flanges and
attachments shall be permitted.

7. CABLE TRAYS
7.1. All cable trays shall be constructed of hot dip galvanized and perforated sheet
steel complying with the requirements of BS 1449:1.1:1991.
7.2. Cables trays shall be supplied in nominal 2.4 m lengths and shall be of the
return flange type.
7.3. Trays up to but not including 150 mm width shall be of thickness 20 SWG.
Tray of width 150 mm to 375 mm shall be of thickness 16 mm SWG.
Trays of width 400 mm to 600 mm shall be of thickness 14 SWG.
7.4. Sections of trays shall be jointed using 6 mm diameter mushroom-headed
safety bolts and nuts complying with the requirements of BS 1449.
7.5. Adequate copper earthing strips shall be fitted at every joint.
7.6. Holes cut in trays for passage of cables shall be suitably bushed.
7.7. Cables shall generally be fixed to and supported by perforated galvanized
sheet steel trays either wall mounted or suspended and supported from
ceilings by sturdy galvanized iron brackets. Cables shall be clipped to trays
by nylon or plastic cable ties.
7.8. Plastic or stainless steel trays shall be used in high corrosion areas.
8. CABLE LADDERS
8.1. All cable support ladders shall be manufactured from pre-galvanized steel
sheet, of minimum thickness 2 mm, complying with the requirements of BS
449-2:1969.
8.2. Ladders shall be hot-dip galvanized to comply with the requirements of BS
729:1971, and shall be suitable for installation in humid conditions prevailing
in the U.A.E.
8.3. The rungs of ladders shall be supported on either ends by hexagonal profiled
steel sheet channels.
8.4. In both horizontal and vertical runs the ladders shall be firmly secured to
walls or suspended from ceilings by brackets to ensure they are able to
withstand the weight of cables.
8.5. Where ladders are mounted on walls, a minimum distance of 25 mm shall be
maintained between walls and cable surfaces.
8.6. Where ladders are run horizontally supported by cantilevers or other devices,
the spacing of the latter shall be in compliance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
8.7. The width of ladders shall be adequate to ensure that the minimum spacing
between surfaces of adjacent cables shall be minimum the diameter of the
larger cable.
8.8. The ladders shall be connected to earth and electrical continuity shall be
maintained throughout their entire lengths.
8.9. The installation shall be complete with all accessories inclusive of necessary
joints, coupling, bends, support brackets, wall and ceiling plates, mounting
rails, take off hooks etc., all manufactured by the manufacturer of the ladders.
8.10. For aesthetic reasons, factory fabricated covers of suitable dimensions shall
be fixed below horizontally run ladders, with minimum 30 mm spacing
between cable surfaces and covers, throughout their routes, particularly in
open areas like garages.

9. UNDERFLOOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
9.1. Wherever required and indicated in drawings, the Contractor shall supply and
install one of the following underfloor trunking/ducting cable distribution
systems, which shall be complete with all essential components and
accessories:
i) Under floor trunking/ducting laid in screed.
ii) Under floor trunking/ducting cast in-situ into the structural slab.
iii) Flush floor cable trunking/ducting.
9.2. The selected system shall comprise:
i) High-quality corrosion-resistant trunking/ducting manufactured from
hot-dipped zinc coated low carbon sheet steel complying with the
requirements of BS EN 10142:2000, or uPVC trunking/ducting
complying with the requirements of BS 4678-4: 1982.
ii) Robustly designed high-pressure, load-bearing, corrosion-resistant
die-cast zinc alloy floor service and junction boxes in compliance
with the current EN Standards.
iii) Electrical power, voice, data and video socket outlets, complete with
wiring, cabling and all necessary accessories.
9.3. To achieve high degree of flexibility, the layout of the trunking system shall
be based on a grid pattern.
9.4. Galvanized steel ducts may be of single compartment or of multiple
compartment type with metallic segregation between power and other ELV
cables. Alternatively, single uPVC ducts may be used for providing insulated
enclosures for the different services.
9.5. All installation works shall be carried out by skilled and experienced
personnel in strict compliance with manufacturer’s installation guidelines and
recommendations, and in close co-ordination with the Main Civil Contractor.
9.6. Prior to placing order for equipment and materials and prior to commencing
any installation works, the Contractor shall submit, for Engineer’s study and
written approval, manufacturer’s installation instructions, schedule of
materials and detailed workshop drawings showing layout of trunking, floor
service outlet and junction boxes.
9.7. For Inscreed systems, the recommended dimensions of service outlet boxes
and junction boxes shall be 300 x 300 x 75-90 mm.
The boxes shall have provisions for access of ducting from all four sides, and
all unused entries shall be plugged with detachable side blanks.
The covers of boxes shall be designed with 6 mm recess to receive tiles,
carpets etc.
The service boxes shall be equipped with suitable hinges designed to enable
the trap cover to open through 180 degrees and to give free access at all times
to power, voice and data outlets.
All boxes shall be adjustable in height independently of the ducting system to
account for the difference in floor thickness.
Adequate measures shall be provided to ensure protection of all emerging
cables against damage.
All boxes and covers shall be equipped with waterproof gaskets and circuit
protective conductors.

9.8. For Raised floor systems, the trunking shall comprise of triple compartment
rectangular steel structure designed to serve as main feeder for distribution of
power, voice and data cables. The recommended depth of the trunking shall
be 38 mm and it shall be complete with covers, compartment segregators and
earthing continuity studs for each length. The thickness of the trunking,
segregators and junction boxes shall not be less than 1.2 mm.
Service boxes shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel and shall be
complete with polyamide trap frame with a carpet trim to cover carpet edges.
The traps shall be designed to accommodate 7 mm thick carpet.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS

The Contractor shall liase with the specialist sub-contractors for CCTV and
ACCESS CONTROL SECURITY Systems, FIRE DETECTION and VOICE
ALARM SYSTEM, and STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM and provide all
containment systems in strict compliance with their respective requirements.

SECTION - 16123
LOW VOLATGE CABLES, WIRES AND ACCESSORIES
The contractor shall supply, install, test and connect all cables and wires, commencing from
the Main Distribution Board, designated MDB, to sub-main Distribution Boards, designated
SMDB, and thence final sub-circuit MCB Distribution boards, designated DB, to isolators for
water and fire fighting pumps, lifts, A/C condensing units etc., all in compliance with these
Specifications and details in single line power distribution schematic drawing and respective
load schedules for various boards.
1. GENERAL.
1.1. Unless specified otherwise, copper conductors of 600/100 V insulation grade

shall be used for all cables. All cables shall be adequately protected in finishes.
1.2. No joints shall be permitted in cable runs between any two points unless lengths
involved are longer than standard manufactured lengths. The joints, if any, and
their positions shall be approved by the Engineer.
1.3. Cable lugs, terminals and sweating sockets, all manufactured in strict compliance
with the requirements of BS 91:1998, including latest amendments, shall be of
correct bores appropriate to the sizes of cables to be connected. The bore shall be
of adequate diameter to accommodate all strands of cable’s core as filling-in of
surplus space with solder shall not be permitted. All soft solder used in cable
installation shall comply with the requirements of BS 219:1977 Grade E or F for
tinning and Grade H for wiped joints.
1.4. In general, routes of various cables shall be indicated in the cable routes drawing
for tendering purposes only. The final routing shall, however, be approved by the
Engineer before any installation is undertaken.
1.5. All works associated with installation of cables shall include jointing material,
cable supports, cleats, brackets, perforated cable trays, ladders etc. together with
all necessary accessories.
1.6. L.V. cables from transformer to MDB shall be supplied and installed by the
Dubai Electricity and Water Authority.
1.7. Without prior approval of the Engineer, the Contractor shall neither drill any
steelworks nor weld any part, component or device to the steelworks to provide
support to the cables.
2. INSTALLATION OF CABLES.
2.1. In general, cables from MDB to SMDBs and from SMDBs to Final MCB
distribution boards, isolators etc. shall be drawn in appropriate size uPVC
conduits, trunking or ducts cast in concrete floors, trenches, or run on
perforated sheet steel cable trays/ladders along routes to be finalized on site.
2.2. External cables laid direct in ground shall be drawn in suitable and
appropriate sized uPVC conduits when crossing roads, footpaths, trenches

Low Voltage Cables, Wires and Accessories
etc. The diameter of uPVC pipes shall generally be between 100 mm to 150
mm.
2.3. Final sub-circuit wiring shall be drawn in conduits or trunking. In general, the
installations shall be concealed within the building fabric. However, in
general service areas, workshop, plant rooms, main electrical room etc., the
installation may be surface mounted.
2.4. In all horizontal and vertical runs of cables along walls, beams, columns,
service ducts, air-wells etc., all cables shall be supported by “Claw” type
cleats or by ladders in compliance with recommendations in BS 7671:2001.
For vertical runs, the spacing between adjacent cables shall be minimum
twice the diameter of the larger cable. The spacing between wall and cables
shall be minimum 25 mm.
2.5. Bends in cables shall be properly supported and shall be of the maximum
possible radius in the space available. The internal radius of every bend shall
not be less than the recommended value in BS 7671:2001.
2.6. Prior to commencing installation works, the Contractor shall submit, for
Engineer’s study and approval, the proposed method of installation of cables
in each area. The submission shall be complete with working drawings with
all details and dimensions for ducts, openings, chases, trenches etc. and
supports for cables.
2.7. The Contractor shall provide numbered brass or plastic discs at each end of
every cable run for easy identification of cables.
3. CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATED COPPER

CABLES
3.1. All thermosetting cables specified shall be of 600/1000 V insulation grade
conforming to the requirements of BS 5467:1997, including latest
amendments.
3.2. The Conductors shall be stranded and of plain annealed high-conductivity
electrical copper complying with the requirements of BS 6360:1991, IEC
228.
3.3. All 4-core cables specified shall have the conductors insulated by XLPE
compound, and the core insulation shall be colored Red, Yellow, Blue and
Black for identification. The bedding for the four cores shall be PVC
compound over which a single layer of galvanized steel wire shall be
provided as armour. The final serving over the armour shall be extruded PVC
sheath of black colour.
3.4. PVC compound used for bedding and sheath shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6746:1990.
3.5. XLPE insulated cables with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases
under fire conditions shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 6724:1997
for armoured cables and B.S. 721:1998 for non-armoured cables.
3.6. XLPE insulated 300/500 V multicore cables with limited circuit integrity
under fire conditions shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 7629:1993.

4. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) INSULATED ARMOURED AND NON-
ARMOURED COPPER CABLES :
4.1. All PVC insulated, single wire armoured/non-armoured PVC sheathed

multicore cables with stranded copper conductors shall conform to the
requirements of BS 6346: 1997, including latest amendments.
4.2. Particulars related to specification of copper conductors, core colour codes,
bedding, sheath etc. shall be the same as for those described for XLPE cables
under Item 6.3 above.
4.3. PVC compound used for insulation, bedding and sheath shall comply with the
5. PVC INSULATED PVC SHEATHED NON-ARMOURED COPPER

CABLES.
5.1. All single and multicore PVC insulated PVC sheathed non-armoured cables
of insulation grade 450/750 V with copper conductors shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6004 : 2000.
5.2. Particulars relating to specifications of copper conductors, PVC compound
etc. shall be the same as for those described for XLPE cables under Item 6.3
above.
6. FLEXIBLE CORDS AND CABLES
6.1. All insulated flexible cords and cables shall be of 300/500 V grade complying
with the requirements of BS 6500:2000.
6.2. All insulated flexible cords and cables for use in high temperature zones shall
comply with requirements of B.S. 6141:1991.
6.3. Final connections to luminaires and pendants shall employ cables suitable for
continuous temperature of 150 deg.C. The cables shall have nickel-plated
conductors and shall be double fibre glass wrapped, braided and silicone
varnished.
6.4. Final connections to heating equipment, and where otherwise subjected to
heat, shall be silicone rubber insulated multicore cables suitable for
continuous temperature of 150 deg. C.
7. FIRE ALARM AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING CABLES.
Thermosetting insulated flexible cords and cables shall be of 300/500 V grade

complying with the requirements of BS 7629: 1993 and BS 6387:1994 Category
CWZ. These cables shall be designed for reduced flame propagation, for low smoke
and corrosive gas emission, and shall be surge, moisture, abrasion and damage
resistant.
8. RUBBER INSULATED CABLES
Rubber insulated cables for electrical power and lighting shall comply with the

9. CO-AXIAL CABLES.
Low-loss co-axial cables conforming to the requirements of BS: 5425:1986 shall be

used for Satellite/Terrestrial Master TV antennae system.
10. MINERAL INSULATED METAL SHEATHED COPPER CABLES.
10.1. Mineral insulated copper sheathed copper conductor cables with rated voltage
not exceeding 750V, with or without an overall high-grade PVC sheath, shall
conform to the requirements of BS 6207-1:1995.
10.2. All terminations for mineral insulated cables shall comply with the
10.3. All works shall be carried out in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and in compliance with BS 6207-3:1995. The Contractor
shall ensure that all installation works shall be carried out by qualified and
specialist personnel who shall have received an approved course of
instructions in the termination and installations of mineral insulated cables.
11. CABLE TERMINATIONS.
11.1. All cables shall terminate in glands recommended by the cable manufacturer.
An earth tag shall be provided to facilitate fitting of earth bonds to the frames
of equipment. A PVC shroud shall be fitted over each gland.
11.2. All terminations shall be carried out using a system of compression jointing
as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
11.3. Special protective bushes shall be used at points where cables pass through
metal surface such as distribution boards and trunking.
12. BINDING AND IDENTIFICATION SLEEVES
Binding and identification sleeves for use on electric cables and wires shall comply
with the requirements of BS 3858:1992.

INTRODUCTION
This document contains du’s guidelines for the design, installation and commissioning of building
infrastructure for supporting telecommunications services in the UAE. The document is to help
building developers deliver high quality, future proof facilities that comply with du’s Fibre technology
(FTTX) network standards. To ensure this compliance du requires building developers to go through
a ‘No Objection Certificate’ (NOC) process, to submit to sites inspections and to provide material
samples for testing. Please contact du for more details about the NOC process.
The guidance in this document is based on international standards and du’s extensive experience in
offering telecommunications services. du always advises its clients to use qualified and certified
professionals in all aspects of telecommunication infrastructure design, installation and
commissioning.
It is recommended to engage with du at an early stage in any development so that process and
design issues can be explained. du welcomes questions from developers so that it can always offer
the best advice and information.
It is important to note that if a building developer or tenant has special needs or enhanced
requirements that may require modifications to these guidelines du must be consulted at the design
stage. In exceptional cases du may need to increase the requirements specified in this document to
be able to offer service.
This document covers the following building types:
• Single villas and villa complexes

• Residential towers and groups of residential towers
• Commercial towers and groups of commercial towers
• Shopping malls
• Group of shops or retails outlets
• Hospital, hotels and other bulk service applications
• Warehouses and sheds
The document is structured so as to provide clear sections on all aspects of the infrastructure
• Telecommunication spaces
• Pathways
• Electro-Mechanical
• Cables
• Duct entry
All telecom spaces, pathways, ducts and cabling system specified in this document are for the
exclusive use of du.
The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing.
Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company PJSC (EITC)
There are separate documents that cover developing outside plant (OSP) for master plans. Please
Building infrastructure standards – V4 contact du if you require more information on such cases.
July 2008
www.du.ae
Copy right © Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company PJSC (EITC)
Building infrastructure standards – V4 -1- www.du.ae

TELECOMMUNICATION SPACES and pathways. This could involve the installation of covers to cable trays; if this is the case these
covers must be removable to allow for the installation of additional cables.
General specifications The walls, floor, and ceiling of telecom rooms must be finished so as to minimize dust and static
electricity. Walls and ceilings shall receive primer and finish coat of light colour paint.
A number of telecom rooms will be required in a building depending on the characteristics of the
building. The following room types are required and the details of these rooms are included in the In order to move equipment into and out of telecom rooms no access from outside of the building to
text below and summarised in Appendix 1. these rooms should be less than 900mm x 2100mm (WxH)
• Main telecom room A telephone socket must be provided in each area of the telecom rooms wired to the building
• Mobile-service room telephone system.
• Roof-top mobile-service room
• Floor telecom closet Safety and other considerations
The height measurements specified are the minimum finished clearance after taking into account All telecom rooms must comply with all municipality and national authority standards and
allowances for raised floors, overhead cable trays and any other obstructions. In the case that regulations; such as those issued by civil defence and utility companies. Notwithstanding this, it is
overhead trays are used a minimum headroom access of 300mm is required above the tray. expected that following will be provided:
In multi-story buildings the telecom rooms should be vertical aligned and linked by a shared • All telecom spaces should be fitted with smoke detectors connected to the building
containment system. This containment system must not reduce the minimum requested space. management system.
All telecom rooms must be dedicated to the use of du. The rooms must be easily accessible to du
• All telecom spaces should be fitted with normal and emergency lighting.
personnel 24 hours a day and secured from unauthorised entry.
• All containment openings to telecom spaces must be sealed with a regulation fire retardant
Telecom rooms must not be in close proximity to any sources of the following:
material.
• Heat
• All doors to telecom rooms must be of solid wood core or steel construction, fire retardant
• Moisture
with a minimum rating of 2 hours. All doors to telecom rooms must be outward opening with
• Corrosive atmospheric or environmental conditions
an automatic door closer system fitted on the hinged edge.
• High voltages,
• Radio frequency interference (RFI) • All doors to telecom rooms must be labelled. Details of the labeling scheme are given in
• Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) Appendix 2.
The rooms must not be directly beneath or next to wet areas such as: • The room must free from contaminants and pollutants as defined in Appendix 3.
• Showers • All telecom rooms should have basic fire fighting provision of two handheld CO2 cylinder
• Washrooms type extinguishers.
• Swimming pools
• Garbage areas Temperature and humidity
If for any reason it is proposed that any part of a telecom room will be located below the water table
All the telecom rooms, with the exception of the floor telecom closets, must be provided with an air
then this must be raised at the design stage. This situation will require a floor drain fitted with an
conditioning system to main the temperature at 20°C ± 3°C and the relative humidity at 50% ± 10%.
automatic submersible pump to counter any risk of water ingress.
To enable the building developer to design the air conditioning system the maximum heat
The rooms should be clean and free from any items not directly related to the specifications in this
dissipation of the equipment in the various room types is given in Appendix 1
document such as:
Whilst the detailed design of the air conditioning system is the responsibility of the building
• Equipment
developer the following design principles must be followed:
• Utility pipes
• Cables • Dedicated duty and stand-by units
• Sprinkler systems
• Units interlocked based on sensing power failure or over temperature.
• Windows
• Stand-by unit connected to emergency electrical supply
• Pests
• All units located outside the telecom rooms
• Both units connected to the building management system
All telecom spaces and pathways must be pest controlled using best available practices. In the case
• Air flow to feed each telecom space via dedicated ducting
of pests it should be noted that rodents often gnaw cables resulting in damage and the potential of
service disruption. Special attention should be given to preventing rodents entering telecom spaces
Building infrastructure standards – V4 -2- www.du.ae Building infrastructure standards – V4 -3- www.du.ae
MAIN TELECOM ROOM MAIN TELECOM ROOM - raised flooring system:
A main telecom room must be provided on the ground floor for all multi-story buildings. This room The main telecom room should have a raised floor. This raised floor should provide a minimum
will be used for the termination of telecom cables and to house telecom equipment both now and in depth of 300mm above the base floor of the room. The floor should comply with the following
the future. additional specifications:
The minimum room dimensions will depend on the function and features of the building. The Tile dimensions
specifications are detailed in Table 1 below and drawings are provided in Appendix 4.
A standard size of 600mm x 600mm must be used. The thickness of bare tile, excluding top and
Single villas Complex of villas Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant Shopping malls, bottom coverings, must be 35mm.
warehouses, groups of
15 to 50 up to G+10 G+11 to G+100 shops, retail outlets
or or and bulk service
Tile surfaces
up to 150 apartments 151 to 1000 apartments applications
or or The top surface of the raised floor tiles must be a high pressure laminate anti-static type. The
up to 9,000m2 9,001 to 90,000m2 underside must have a conductive surface.
No requirement 3 x 3 x 3m 3 x 3 x 3m 4 x 3 x 3m 4 x 3 x 3m
(W xDxH) (W xDxH) (W xDxH) (W xDxH) Tile core
Located in a common Located on the ground floor Located on the ground floor Located on the ground
area of the master plan common area common area floor common area Calcium Sulphate based tiles are preferred.
Table 1 - Main telecom room specifications To comply with UAE regulations the tile panel must have the following fire rating:
The door to the main telecom room must be outward opening with a minimum opening of 900mm x • Fire retardant - 2 hours with a flame spread of 20
2100mm (WxH). The door should be labelled ‘Main Telecom Room’. • Heat resistant minimum of 60 minutes.
2
The main telecom room must be provided with a raised floor with a height of 300mm above the base Load rating - uniform: The minimum uniform distributed load must be 7kN/m
floor of the room. The detailed specification of the raised floor is provided in the next section.
Load rating - concentrated
In addition to the basic fire fighting provision detailed earlier, the main telecom room must be
provided with an additional automatic fire suppression system that uses inert atmospheric gases. The minimum concentrated load is 18.6kN/m2. Tile deflection must not exceed 2mm.
The system must be linked to a fire suppression system panel outside of the room.
Load rating - collapse or ultimate
If the inside level of the room is not at the same height as the outside access then a suitable ramped
2
entry with an anti-slip surface must me provided. A threshold step of 100mm must also be provided The minimum collapse load must be 55kN/m
inside the room under the raised floor to prevent any ingress of water from outside the room.
Electrical performance
All cables in the main telecom room must be properly routed to the desired destinations under the
raised floor, for that an adequate sized cable tray system must be installed to maintain the • Surface and volume resistance (at 500V) 1x105 – 1x1010 ohm
connectivity as described in appendix 4 • All metal parts of the raised floor system must be earth bonded
Pedestals
The pedestal specification must be as follows:
• All pedestals in contact with the finished slab surface

• Fixed with glue and screws to the finished slab
• Allow a void below the raised floor of minimum depth 300mm
• Support a minimum off-center loading of 12kN
• Support a minimum centre loading of 30kN
• Have a height adjusting and locking nut system
Understructure system
A stringer system must be provided where the stringers are able to support a minimum loading on
the raised floor of 1kN.
Tile lifter
A tile lifter must be provided in each area of the main telecom room.
CLUSTERED BUILDINGS- group of towers
Mobile-service rooms must be provided every 10 floors starting at the lowest basement level with a
If a project consists of a cluster of multi-tenant buildings then all of the requirements of a single size 3m x 2m x 3m (WxDxH) with a secured access.
tower still apply. However, it may be possible to reduce the requirements for individual telecom
rooms. This would require the cluster of buildings to be linked to the designated main telecom room. The mobile-service rooms must have a minimum distributed floor load rating of 10 KN/m2
The details of this arrangement should be discussed with du at the design stage.
The doors to these rooms must be outward opening with a minimum opening of 900mm x 2100mm
FLOOR TELECOM CLOSETS (WxH). The doors should be labelled ‘Mobile service room’
A floor telecom closet must be provided on each floor of all multi-story buildings. The floor telecom ROOF-TOP MOBILE-SERVICE ROOM (up to G+10)
closet is required to provide a flexible point for the installation and maintenance of telecom cables.
The specifications are detailed in Table 2 below and drawings provided in Appendix 4 Roof-top mobile-service rooms must be provided on the roof of all multi-tenant buildings up to G+10
and access must be provided to the building riser system. The specifications are detailed below in
Table 4 and drawings are provided in Appendix 4.
Single villas Complex of Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant Shopping Groups of shops, Warehouses
villas malls retail outlets and
up to G+10 G+11 to G+100 bulk services
15 to 50 or or applications Single Complex of Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant Shopping Groups of shops, retail Warehouses
up to 150 151 to 1000 villas villas malls outlets and bulk services
apartments apartments up to G+10 G+11 to applications
or or 15 to 50 or G+100
up to 9,000m2 9,001 to 90,000m2 up to 150 or
apartments 151 to 1000
Residential: Residential: or apartments
No No 2 x 1 x 3m 2x1x 3 x 3 x 3m 2 x 2 x 3m No up to or
requirement* requirement* (W xDxH) 3m(W xDxH) (WxDxH) (W xDxH) requirement* 9,000m2 9,001 to
90,000m2
Commercial: Commercial: Located in all Located in a common No No 3 x 3 x 3m No Defined at Defined at Defined at
2 x 2 x 3m 2 x 2 x 3m served floors area on each floor requirement requirement (W xDxH) requirement design stage design stage design stage
(W xDxH) (W xDxH)l
On roof top
Located in a Located in a Table 4 - Roof-top mobile services room specifications
common area on common area on
each floor each floor
Table 2 - Floor telecom closet specifications The door to this room should be outward opening with a minimum opening of 900mm x 2100mm
* Note: In the case of a multi-story home, office, warehouse, retail shop, etc, floor distribution boxes will be required
(WxH); the doors should be labelled ‘Roof Telecom Room’.
with a minimum size of 300 x 300 x 150 mm (WxHxD)
2
The roof-top mobile room must have a minimum distributed floor load rating of 10 KN/m
The temperature of the floor telecom closets must be maintained in range 20 – 30oC. In special
cases where the floor telecom closet may need to house non-standard equipment the room An opening must be provided with a dimension of 600mm x 400mm (WxH), 500mm below the room
specification must be increased in line with those for a main telecom room. This must be discussed ceiling in walls facing the building’s roof-top area.
at the design stage.
The closets must be provided with two outward opening doors with a minimum total opening of Space must be reserved on the roof-top of the building for the installation of mobile-service
1500mm x 2100mm (WxH). The door should be labelled ‘Floor Telecom Closet’ antennas. This will vary from building to building, but will typically be at the corners of the building or
on any raised structure on the roof-top. The exact details will be defined at the design stage.
MOBILE-SERVICE ROOMS (more than G+10)
Mobile-service rooms must be provided in all multi-tenant buildings above G+10. The specifications
are detailed in Table 3 below and drawings are provided in Appendix 4.
Single Complex of Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant Shopping Groups of shops, Warehouses

villas villas malls retail outlets and bulk
up to G+10 G+11 to G+100 services applications
15 to 50 or or
up to 150 151 to 1000
apartments apartments
or or
up to 9,000m2 9,001 to 90,000m2
No No No 3 x 2 x 3m Defined at Defined at Defined at

requirement requirement requirement (WxDxH) design stage design stage design stage
Every 10 floors
starting from
lowest basement
Table 3 – Mobile-service room specifications
HOME CONSOLIDATION CABINETS - residential OFFICE CONSOLIDATION CABINETS (commercial shell and core)
The home consolidation cabinet is a space to house du’s network termination equipment. It also In the case of a shell and core development one consolidation cabinet must be provided in each
serves as the distribution point for all of the local wiring. A consolidation cabinet should be provided floor telecom closet. The cabinet specifications are as follows:
in each home. This should be a telecom cabinet with the following minimum specifications:
• Dimensions 42U x 800mm x 800mm (HxWxD)
• Minimum internal dimensions 860mm x 600mm x 150 mm (HxWxD) • Fitted with RJ45 patch panel
• Mounted flush with the wall • Lockable side and rear panels and a lockable front door
• Located in an accessible area inside the home close to the entrance and not inside a • Provision for an air circulation of one change per hour
kitchen, laundry room or bedroom • Vertical and horizontal cable management for UTP patching cables
• Installed at a height of 1200mm (measured between the finished floor level and the bottom • Sufficient cable entries to accommodate the incoming fibre optic and UTP cables
edge of the cabinet) • Fitted with minimum 8 way power distribution unit (PDU)
• An adequate safe working space around the location • Jacking feet
• Adequate ambient lighting • Labelled with floor number
• Not close to sources of water or heat
• Not close to any electrical distribution or bus bars When a tenant moves into a shell and core building it is expected that they will install consolidation
• Adequate ventilation must be provided; minimum of one air change per hour. cabinets in each office or business area. The specifications of these consolidation cabinets are as
• Fitted with RJ45 patch panel described in the previous section on ‘office consolidation cabinets - commercial predefined rooms’.
• Lockable front door However these specifications may need to be increased to the meet tenant’s actual requirements.
• Vertical and horizontal cable management for (Unshielded Twisted Pair) UTP patch cables The tenant may wish to provide their own telecom room space and extend the connectivity to the
• Sufficient cable entries to accommodate the incoming fibre optic and UTP cables cabinet in the floor telecom closet. Where UTP cables do need to terminate in the floor telecom
• Contain a dual 13A switched socket power outlet fed from a dedicated circuit breaker on the closet this must be on a wall mounted patch panel or termination block at a common point
domestic supply accessible to du.
• Labelled with villa or flat number
All installed cables must be properly routed inside the floor telecom closet to the desired destination
under a raised floor or in overhead cable trays. Additionally, an adequately sized cable tray system
A drawing of a typical home consolidation cabinet is provided in Appendix 4. must be installed to maintain connectivity between the cabinet and the wall mounted patch panel
where the UTP cables are terminated (see recommendations in Appendix 5).
OFFICE CONSOLIDATION CABINETS In these types of cases the building tenants will need to discus the requirements with du at the time
(Commercial predefined offices, warehouses, sheds, shops) of fit-out.
The office consolidation cabinet is a space to house du’s network termination equipment. It also
serves as the distribution point for all of the local wiring. A consolidation cabinet must be provided in
each business area. This should be a telecom cabinet with the following minimum specifications:
• Minimum internal dimensions 860mm x 600mm x 300 mm (HxWxD)

• Located in an accessible area inside the office close to the entrance and not inside a pantry,
washroom, etc.
• Installed at a height of 1200mm (measured between the finished floor level and the bottom
edge of the cabinet)
• An adequate safe working space around the location
• Adequate ambient lighting
• Not close to sources of water or heat
• Not close to any electrical distribution or bus bars
• Adequate ventilation must be provided; minimum of one air change per hour
• Fitted with RJ45 patch panel
• Fitted with patch panel or termination block / frame
• Lockable front door
• Vertical and horizontal cable management for UTP patching cables
• Sufficient cable entries to accommodate the incoming fibre optic and UTP cables
• Contain a dual 13A switched socket power outlet fed from a dedicated circuit breaker on the
domestic supply
• Labelled with office/room number
A drawing of a typical business consolidation cabinet is provided in Appendix 4.
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL EARTH BARS – all rooms
All telecom rooms must be provided with electrical supplies. The details of the requirements for the All telecom rooms, with the exception of floor telecom closets, must be fitted with two clean earth
various rooms are included in the text below and summarised in Appendix 1. bars of the following specifications:
Diagrams of the telecom rooms showing the positions of the electrical systems and electrical single • One earth bar for AC
line diagrams are included in Appendix 4. • One earth bar for DC
• Minimum length of 500mm
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – main telecom room • Minimum of 10 holes of 12mm diameter
• Each must be connected to its own earth pit with a resistance of less than 1 ohm
Sub-Main Distribution Board • Clearly labelled as AC and DC respectively
The main telecom room should be provided with a Sub-Main Distribution Board (SMDB) with a 125A
main incomer from the building’s Essential Distribution Board (EDB).
The output side of the SMDB must have a minimum of 7 ways, fitted with Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers (MCCB) as detailed below:
• 4 x 63A
• 1 x 40A
• 2 x Not fitted (Spare)
Distribution Sockets
Two 13A twin sockets must be installed in the main telecom room.
One twin 13A socket must also be provided located next to the entry door at a height of 2.2m above
finished floor level.
These sockets must be supplied from the normal building utility supply on a spur with a dedicated
20A circuit breaker.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – floor telecom closet

The following electrical systems must be provided in the floor telecom closet
• Two 13A twin sockets, one on each side of the closet, fed from the normal building supply
on spurs with dedicated circuit breakers rated at 20 A.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – mobile-service room

The following electrical systems must be provided in the mobile-service telecom room:
• 63A 3 phase isolators fed from essential building power

• Two 13A twin sockets fed from the normal building supply on spurs with dedicated circuit
breakers rated at 20A.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – roof-top mobile-service room

The following electrical systems must be provided in the roof-top mobile-service room:
• 63A 3 phase isolators fed from essential building power

• Two 13A twin sockets fed from the normal building supply on spurs with dedicated circuit
breakers rated at 20A.
Building infrastructure standards – V4 - 10 - www.du.ae Building infrastructure standards – V4 - 11 - www.du.ae

PATHWAYS HORIZONTAL CONTAINMENT – multi-story / multi-tenant buildings
General Specifications Floor telecom closet to consolidation points
The following requirements must be applied to all containment systems: The horizontal containment for routing cables from the floor telecom closets to consolidation points
on the served floor can use a number of systems (conduits, cable trays, etc.). The solution will
• The containment system must be designed so that installed cables do not exceed the depend on the characteristics of the building type; the specifications are given in Appendix 1.
minimum specified bend radius Conduits must only be used when the consolidation point locations are permanent, the cable density
• All metal containment parts must be free from sharp edges and earth bonded is low and the flexibility to modify the routing is not required. Specification for the size of this
• Telecom riser openings must be sealed with a suitable fire retardant material containment is given in Appendix 5.
• Cable trays must be easily accessible in common areas to facilitate any future provision of
additional cables Generally, the following minimum dimensions must be provided:
• Any cable trays that are in publically accessible areas less than 4.8m above the floor must
• One 200mm x 100mm (WxH) cable tray with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF) as a main
be covered
route from floor telecom closet to main corridors and then branches to each home
• Containment systems must not run through areas exposed to excessive heat, moisture,
consolidation cabinet through cable trays of 50mm x 50mm (WxH)
corrosive atmospheric or environmental conditions, high voltages, radio frequency
interference (RFI) or electro-magnetic interference (EMI)
• For all containment systems a minimum separation must be maintained from sources of Mobile service antennas
electromagnetic interference. Further details are provided in Appendix 6.
• The building developer may want to consider redundant containment systems, particularly in Cable trays must be provided to route mobile-service antenna cables from the floor telecom closets
commercial or prestigious developments. du must be contacted at the design stage to to the antenna locations. One cable tray following minimum dimensions must be provided:
discuss any such requirements.
• 200mm x 50mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF)
VERTICAL CONTAINMENT – multi-story / multi-tenant buildings Final Antenna plan / location will be provided at the design stage.
Risers must be provided in multi-story multi-tenant buildings to allow the installation of telecom
HORIZONTAL CONTAINMENT - within homes
cables from the main telecom room to the floor telecom closets, mobile -services rooms and roof-top
mobile-service rooms. Hot-Dip Galvanised (HDG) slotted steel cable trays must be provided in the
All UTP cables inside the home must run through PVC conduit with a minimum 25mm diameter from
risers to carry the telecom cables between all of the telecom rooms.
the home consolidation point to each dual outlet. If more than one dual outlet is fed by a conduit
then the size and quantity of the conduit may need to be up rated. Please refer to Appendix 5
It is recommended that the main telecom room and floor telecom closets should be designed so that
they are vertically aligned within the building.
Intermediate PVC junction / pull boxes must be provided on individual runs that exceed 30m. PVC
junction /pull boxes must also be provided where an individual conduit run has a sharp change in
Two cable trays, with the following minimum dimensions must be provided:
direction.
• One of 500mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF)
The conduit boxes referred to above must have the following minimum internal dimensions:
• One of 300 mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF)
• 300mm x 300mm x 150 mm (HxWxD)
If it is not possible to provide all of the cable trays runs vertically then horizontal trays of the same
size should be provided.
CLUSTER OF BUILDINGS – groups of towers
VERTICAL CONTAINMENT - within homes Where a building consists of a group of towers (on a common shared podium) all of the
requirements of a single tower still apply. In addition cable trays must be provided linking the main
In case of multi-floor apartments / villas the UTP cables between the floors must run through telecom rooms of the towers. Two cable trays following minimum dimensions must be provided:
(minimum) 50mm diameter PVC conduits via a junction / pull boxes located on each floor. The
junction / pull boxes must be of minimum dimensions 300mm x 300mm x 150mm (WxHxD). The • 300 mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange (HDRF).
slab opening (if required) for these conduits must be in a suitable and accessible location in every
floor. It is recommended that all vertical conduit runs be aligned to ease the installation of cables. These trays should be readily accessible in common areas to facilitate any future provision of
additional cables. However, if these trays are in an area accessible to the public and are less than
4.8m above the floor then the trays should be covered.

CABLES For all scenarios except commercial shell and core 3m of spare fibre must be left neatly coiled in the
consolidation cabinet. In the commercial shell and core cases enough fibre to reach the furthest part
of the floor area must be left coiled in the consolidation cabinet in the floor telecom closet.
General specifications
The fibre should be labelled at both ends with a unique reference for the consolidation point served
The quantity and type of cabling that must be provided by the building developer shown in Appendix and the room or area of origin. Labeling details are included in Appendix 2
1 and described in the text below.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES – from main telecom room to roof-top mobile-service
Building developer must submit as-built drawings of all the cabling they provide to du. This must
include test reports showing that the performance of the cabling system meets defined room
requirements. Details for labeling of cables are included in Appendix 2 and the details of cable
performance standards and testing are included in Appendix 7. 2 fibre pair cables must be provided from the main telecom room to the roof-top mobile-service
rooms. 10m of spare fibre must be left neatly coiled.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES - specification
The following type of fibre must be provided:
CAT3 COPPER CABLES – from main telecom room to consolidation points
CAT3 copper cables must be provided in commercial areas and buildings. The quantity of CAT3
• Single mode
cables from the main telecom room to the consolidation points depends on the characteristics of the
• Indoor drop fibres
building. Table 6 below provides details on how to calculate the number of cables required.
• Individual pairs
• Suitable for LC connectors
• Bend insensitive Single Complex of Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant Shopping malls Bulk service Warehouses
• Compliant with ITU-T G.652 villas villas and groups applications
up to G+10 G+11 to G+100 shops or retail
• Jacket made from halogen free and flame retardant material
15 to 50 or or outlets
• Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) up to 9,000m2 9,001 to 90,000m2
Commercial: Commercial:
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES – from main telecom room to consolidation points No No 2
1 pair per 100m of
2
1 pair per 100m of 6 pairs per shop Defined at 6 pairs per
requirement requirement leasable area plus leasable area plus or for shops over design stage warehouse
The quantity fibre optic cables that must be provided and installed from the main telecom room to 20% spare (add 1 20% spare (add 1 500m2 6 pairs per
the consolidation points depends on the characteristics of the building. Table 5 below provides pair for any offices pair for any offices 500m2
less than less than
details on how to calculate the quantity of fibre optic cables required. 100m2) 2
100m )
Table 6 – CAT3 cable requirements
Single Complex of Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant Shopping malls Bulk service Warehouses

villas villas applications
The cable specification must be of the following specifications:
and groups
up to G+10 G+11 to G+100 shops or retail
15 to 50 or or outlets • Multi-pair Category 3 as per TIA/EIA-568-B
up to 150 151 to 1000 • CMR or LSZH sheath
apartments apartments
or or
up to 9,000m
2
9,001 to 90,000m
2
The cables must be provided from the main telecom room to each consolidation point. The cables
must be continuous lengths free from joints or branches. The cables must pass through the floor
No No Residential: Residential: telecom closet.
requirement requirement 1 pair per 1 pair per 1 pair per shop or Defined at 1 pair per
apartment apartment for shops over design stage warehouse In the main telecom room 10m of spare cable must be left neatly coiled.
500m2 , 1 pair per
Commercial: Commercial: 500m2
2
1 pair per 100m of 1 pair per 100m of
2 For all scenarios except commercial shell and core 3m of spare cable must be left neatly coiled in
leasable area plus leasable area plus the consolidation cabinet. In the commercial shell and core cases enough cable to reach the furthest
20% spare (add 1 20% spare (add 1 part of the floor area must be left coiled in the consolidation cabinet in the floor telecom closet.
pair for any offices pair for any offices
less than less than
2
100m ) 100m )
2 The Cat 3 cables should be labelled at both ends with a unique reference for the consolidation point
Table 5 – Fibre optic cable requirements served and the room or area of origin. Labeling details are included in Appendix 2
The fibres must be provided from the main telecom room to each consolidation point. The fibres
should be continuous lengths free from joints, branches or patching. The fibres should pass through
the floor telecom closet.
At the main telecom room 10m of spare fibre length must be left neatly coiled in all scenarios.

CAT6 COPPER CABLES – from consolidation points to building outlets ENTRY DUCTS
To deliver services from the consolidation points the building outlets unshielded twisted pair (UTP) The building developer must provide lead-in ducts from the main telecom room to the plot boundary.
copper cables must be provided. The full design is the responsibly of the building developer, The exact connection points at the plot boundary will depend on whether du network already
however, the following minimum requirements must be followed for the efficient and effective reaches the plot.
provision of services:
Option 1 – du duct network already exists
• The cables must conform to a minimum of CAT6 specification (Category 6, 100 Ohm, 4 pair
24 AWG as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Addendum 1) The building developer will be responsible to connect to du ducting system. The operator will identify
• The wiring must be in a ‘star’ topology fanning out from the consolidation point. the location and quantity of their lead-in ducts.
• Dual RJ45 outlets with spring load sliding shutters must be provided where ever service is
required (all outlets should comply with the performance specifications as detailed in Option 2 – du duct network is still to be built
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Addendum 6.)
• Each socket in the dual RJ45 outlet must be wired back to the consolidation point The building developer will be responsible to extend the lead-in duct to 1m outside the plot
• Outlets must not be cascaded or looped and there must be no splitting of cable pairs boundary. The building developer is responsible for locating and clearly identifying lead-in ducts.
• The maximum cable length from consolidation point to outlet must not exceed 90m
• At the consolidation point the cables should be terminated on an RJ45 patch panel and In both cases the building developer will be responsible for the Maintenance and repair of lead-in
labelled with the socket and outlet served ducts.
• In each outlet each cable must be terminated to maintain the twists in each pair up to within
5mm of the termination The lead-in ducts will be for the exclusive use of du. The quantity and size of these ducts for
• Proper strain relief should be provided at the terminated ends of the cable different kind of developments is detailed in Appendix 1.
• The components of the CAT6 system must be from the same supplier or at least compatible
The lead-in duct specifications are as follows:
to insure maximum performance
• Design should incorporate built-in flexibility to meet the growing needs of the occupants.
• Made from black uPVC
• The CAT6 cabling system must be tested using an appropriate field test instrument for
• Upmost part of ducts must be buried to a depth of 600mm below finished ground level
compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Category 6 (or equivalent if a higher specification
has been used). • Clearly marked above ground level for easy location
• Numbering and colouring of the pairs should be as defined in EIA/TIA 568B, ISO 11801 / • Sloping away from the building
EN50173 using the T568B option. • Protected by concrete when running under permanent paved surfaces
• Sealed at each end to prevent the ingress of any materials such as water, sub-soil, gas, and
pests
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
• An entry/pull box must be installed for any right-angled or sharp bends in the lead-in duct
route
Public phones, ATM machines and retail kiosks • If required at the entry to the main telecom room, a wide-angle long radius bend (factory
made) may be provided; alternatively an entry box may also be provided
Provision needs to be made for the connection of public phones, ATM machines and retail kiosks. • All ducts must include a draw rope made of twisted mildew and rot resistant polypropylene;
This must use the same design as that prescribed for commercial buildings; one fibre pair and a minimum outside diameter of 6mm; minimum tensile strength of 2400lbs / 1000kg
CAT3 cable pair from the main telecom room to a business consolidation cabinet. The business
consolidation cabinet must be in a secure location. If CAT6 cable is extended to the location of the In case of combined plots, two entry locations are still required for primary and secondary network
public phone, ATM machine or retail kiosk it must not exceed 90m connections. (This will be advised by du at the design stage)
It is the responsibility of the building developer / consultant to coordinate with du at the design stage
for any special or non-standard requirements.
LEAD-IN DUCTS - Complex of villas
In the case of a complex of villas the building developer must connect the lead-in ducts to each villa
in the complex. The lead-in duct size must not be reduced until the branching point for an individual
villa.
LEAD-IN DUCTS – group of buildings

In cases where the building developer wishes to share lead-in ducts between a group of buildings
(not on a common shared podium) then the design needs must be discussed with du at the design
stage.

Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant
up to G+11 to
Complex of Villas G+10 or G+100 or Groups of shops or Hospitals and hotels (bulk
Infrastructure element / building category
www.du.ae
Single Villas Shopping malls Warehouses and sheds

15 to 50 up to 150 apartments 151 to 1000 apartments retails outlets service)
or or
2 2
up to 9,000m 9,001 to 90,000m
3m x 3m x 3m 3m x 3m x 3m 3m x 4m x 3m 3m x 4m x 3m 3m x 3m x 3m 3m x 3m x 3m 3m x 4m x 3m
Main Telecom Room -
(on ground floor) (on ground floor) (on ground floor) (on ground floor) (for a complex of warehouses) (for a complex of shops) (on ground floor)
4m x 3m x 3m
APPENDIX 1 –specification of minimum quantities and dimensions
Mobile Service Room - - - (every 10 floors starting Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
from lowest basement)
3m x 3m x 3m
Roof-top Mobile-Service Room - - - Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
(on roof-top)
2m x 1m x 3m 2m x 1m x 3m (WxDxH)
Residential - - - - - -
(WxDxH) (all (all floors)
Floor Telecom Closet
2m x 2m x 3m
floors) 2m x 2m x 3m (WxDxH) 3m x 3m x 3m (WxDxH) 2m x 2m x 3m (WxDxH) 2m x 2m x 3m (WxDxH)
Commercial - - -
Spaces (WxDxH) (all (all floors) (all served floors) (all floors) (all floors)
Home Consolidation 12U x 600mm x 150mm 12U x 600mm x 150mm 12U x 600mm
floors) x 150mm 12U x 600mm x 150mm
Residential - - - -
Cabinet (HxWxD) (HxW xD) (HxWxD) (HxWxD)
Commercial 12U x 600mm x 300mm 12U x 600mm x 300mm 12U x 600mm x 300mm 12U x 600mm x 300mm 12U x 600mm x 300mm
- - -
(pre-defined offices) (HxWxD) (HxWxD) (HxWxD) (HxWxD) (HxWxD)
42U x 800mm x 800mm 42U x 800mm x 800mm
(HxWxD) (HxWxD)
Office Consolidation
(in floor telecom closet) (in floor telecom closet)
Cabinet Commercial
- - - - - -
(shell and core)
12U x 600mm x 300mm 12U x 600mm x 300mm
(HxWxD) (HxWxD)
(in each office area) (in each office area)
Cable trays Cable trays Cable trays Conduit Cable trays
Conduit Conduit
1 x 500mm x 100mm + 1 x 500mm x 100mm + 1 x 500mm x 100mm + 2 x 50mm (Quantiy x 1 x 500mm x 100mm +
- 19 -
Main Risers 2 x 50mm 2 x 50mm -

1 x 300mm x 100mm 1 x 300mm x 100mm 1 x 300mm x 100mm Diameter) / as required 1 x 300mm x 100mm
(Quantiy x Diameter) (Quantiy x Diameter)
(Quantity x WxH) (Quantity x WxH) (Quantity x WxH) (Quantity x WxH)
main cable tray:
1 x 200mm x 100mm
main cable tray: (Quantity x WxH) (HDG)
1 x 200mm x 100mm from Floor telecom closet
(Quantity x WxH) (HDG) to main corridor
from Floor telecom closet and
Residential - - to main corridor brach cable tray to each HCP: - - - -
and 1x50mmx50mm
Building infrastructure standards – V4
brach cable tray to each HCP: (Quantity xWxH) and

1x50mmx50mm 1 x 200mm x 100mm
(Quantity xWxH) (Quantity x WxH) (HDG)
from Floor telecom closet
to antenna locations
main cable tray (minimum):
Pathways
1 x 200mm x 100mm
(Quantity x WxH)
Horizontal main cable tray (minimum):
(HDG) from Floor telecom
1 x 200mm x 100mm
closet to main corridor
(Quantity x WxH) (HDG)
and properly sized cable tray properly sized cable tray
from Floor telecom closet
Commercial brach cable tray to each OCP system from nearest telecom system from nearest telecom
- - to main corridor - -
(pre-defined offices) (minimum): 1x50mmx50mm room to each consolidation room to each
and point (defined at design stage)
(Quantity xWxH) point (defined at design
brach cable tray to each and stage) consolidation
OCP (minimum):
1 x 200mm x 100mm
1x50mmx50mm (Quantity (Quantity x WxH)
xW xH)
(HDG) from Floor
telecom closet to antenna
locations
properly sized cable tray properly sized cable tray properly sized cable tray properly sized cable
Commercial system from floor telecom system from floor telecom system from floor telecom tray system from floor
- - -
(shell and core) closet to each consolidation closet to each consolidation closet to each consolidation closet to each consolidation
telecom
point (defined at design point (defined at design point (defined at design
stage) stage) stage) point (defined at design stage)
The quantity and location of the entry boxes will depend on the route from the main telecom room to
du network. Entry boxes must be included wherever the duct system has right-angle or sharp bends
entry/pull boxes will depend on the characteristics of the building development. The details for entry
accessible in common areas to facilitate any future provision of additional cables. However, if these
Entry boxes are required for du to install their cables through the lead-in duct. The type and size of
www.du.ae
The quantity of trays required will depend on the entry duct requirements specified in Appendix 1.
trays are in an area accessible to the public and are less that 4.8m above the floor then the trays
(HDG) slotted steel cable trays must be provided as an alternative. These trays must be easily
Where lead-in ducts cannot be routed directly into the main telecom room Hot-Dip Galvanised
A cable tray of minimum dimensions 500mm x 100mm (WxH) with Heavy Duty Return Flange
A more detailed set of entry box specifications and drawings are included in Appendix 8.
An earth rod must be provided with a resistance of lees than 5 ohms.
boxes are included the text below and summarised in Appendix 1.
(HDRF) will be required for each pair of D54 entry duct pipes.
- 18 -
Fitted with a ductile iron frame and cover
The following specifications must be followed:
Constructed of reinforced concrete

LEAD-IN DUCTS - building entry
or other factors to facilitate cable pulling.

Cover marked ‘du - Telecom’
LEAD-IN DUCTS – entry box
Minimum load rating 400kN

must be covered.
•
•
•
•
•
particularly important for cables and consolidation cabinets where a high quality printed self-
The type of label used must be suitable for the object being labelled and its environment. This is
point where the lead-in ducts enter the plot. The label should read ‘Telecom duct’ followed by the
A high quality outdoor label should be fixed to the outside of the building or compound wall at the
DU.MTR-CP.02.02#F0002 - fibre core 2 from the du main telecom room area to the consolidation
DU.MTR-CP.01.01#F0001 - fibre core 1 from the Du main telecom room area to the consolidation
All the infrastructure components described in this document must be clearly and uniquely labelled.
www.du.ae
Meaningful references; e.g. ‘Apartment number and floor’, Villa number and street, etc.
plot number and, if there is more that one lead-in duct location, a unique reference number.
The label information must correspond with the descriptions on the as-built drawings.
All telecom space must be labelled with the function of the space and the floor level.
Cable trays and conduits must be labelled based on the services to be carried:
All consolidation points must be labelled with a meaningful reference.
APPENDIX 2 – administration and labelling scheme
CP.01.01 - consolidation point in apartment 1 on the first floor
- 21 -
CP.02.02 - consolidation point in Villa 2 in street 2

All cable types to be labelled
point in apartment 1 on the first floor

Both ends to correspond
Both ends to be labelled
laminating type must be used.
Mobile-service cables
CONSOLIDATION POINTS
Floor Telecom Closet 12
Mobile-service Room B5
point in Villa 2 in street 2
Telecom cables
Main Telecom Room 1
TELECOM SPACES
LEAD-IN DUCTS
CABLE TRAYS
Examples:
Examples:
Examples:
CABLES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multi-Tenant Multi-tenant
up to G+10 G+11 to G+100
Infrastructure element / Building category Complex of Villas or or Groups of shops or retails Hospitals and hotels (bulk
Single Villas Shopping malls Warehouses and sheds
15 to 50 up to 150 apartments 151 to 1000 apartments outlets service)
www.du.ae
or or
up to 9,000m2 9,001 to 90,000m2
Residential Installed by du Installed by du 1 pair per apartment 1 pair per apartment - - - -
1 pair per 100m2 of leasable 1 pair per 100m 2 of leasable
Fibre Optic Cables area plus 20% spare area plus 20% spare 1 pair per shop or for shops 1 pair per shop or for shops
Commercial - - Installed by du -
(add 1 pair for any offices less (add 1 pair for any offices less over 500m2 , 1 pair per 500m 2 2
over 500m , 1 pair per 500m
2
Cables than 100m 2 ) than 100m 2 )
2 2
1 pair per 100m of leasable 1 pair per 100m of leasable
area plus 20% spare area plus 20% spare 6 pairs per shop or for shops 6 pairs per shop or for shops
Copper cables (CAT3) Commercial - - - -
(add 1 pair for any offices less (add 1 pair for any offices less over 500m2 , 6 pairs per 500m 2 2
over 500m , 6 pairs per 500m
2
than 100m 2 ) than 100m 2 )
Copper cables (CAT6) 2 pairs per outlet 2 pairs per outlet 2 pairs per outlet 2 pairs per outlet 2 pairs per outlet 2 pairs per outlet 2 pairs per outlet 2 pairs per outlet
1 x 125A plus DB
1 x 125A plus DB 1 x 125A plus DB
2 x 13A twin socket
Main Telecom Room - 2 x 13A twin socket 2 x 13A twin socket Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
1 x AC and DC earth bars 1 x AC and DC earth bars
1 x AC and DC earth bars
Electrical Supply
1 x 63A isolator 1 x 63A isolator
Mobile Service Rooms - - 2 x 13A twin socket 2 x 13A twin socket Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
1 x AC and DC earth bars 1 x AC and DC earth bars
Main Telecom Room - 30KW 30KW 30KW Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
36kW for Roof-top room 36kW for Roof-top room
- 20 -
Heat dissipation and and
Mobile Service Rooms - - Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
13kW for each mobile service 13kW for each mobile service
room room
Electrical and
environmental Roof-top room
2 2
Floor Loading - - 100kN/m (distributed load) 100kN/m (distributed load) Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
Mobile Service Rooms
All telecom rooms

Air Conditioning (excluding floor - Dedicated air-conditioning system to maintain room temperature at 20o C ±3oC
closets)
Main Telecom Room - 2 x hand-held CO2 cylinder extinguishers, 1 x smoke detector and automatic fire suppression system (Inert gas type)
Floor Telecom Closet 2 x hand-held CO2 cylinder 2 x hand-held CO2 cylinder
Roof-top Mobile extinguishers extinguishers
Fire fighting
Service Room Mobile - - Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage Defined at design stage
Services Rooms 1 x smoke detector connected 1 x smoke detector connected
to BMS to BMS
2 x D56 (50mm) per
2 x D56 (50mm) per retail
warehouse
2 x D56 (50mm) per villa 4 x D54 (100mm) primary route 4 x D54 (100mm) primary route 4 x D54 (100mm) primary route 2 x D54 (100mm) primary route
2 x D54 (100mm) primary plot
and and and 2 x D54 (100mm) primary plot and
Ducts 2 x D56 (50mm) entry
4 x D54 (100mm) for plot entry 4 x D54 (100mm) secondary 4 x D54 (100mm) secondary 4 x D54 (100mm) secondary entry 2 x D54 (100mm) secondary
Entry Duct and route
route route route and
2 x D54 (100mm) secondary
2 x D54 (100mm) secondary plot entry
plot entry
600mm x 600mm x 800mm 600mm x 600mm x 800mm 600mm x 600mm x 800mm
600mm x 600mm x 800mm
Entry Box per villa JRC12 JRC12 JRC12 per warehouse per shop JRC12
per villa
plus JRC12 for plot entry plus JRC12 for plot entry plus JRC12 for plot entry
APPENDIX 3 – building contaminants APPENDIX 4 – typical drawings / layouts
Contaminant Maximum acceptable concentration Fire Alarm Panel
Chlorine 0.01 ppm

Dust 100 μg/m³/24h
Hydrocarbons 4 μg/m³/24h
Hydrogen sulphide 0.05 ppm 900mm.
2 x handheld CO2
Nitrogen oxides 0.1 ppm cylinder extinguishers
13A Twin Socket fed from utility power
Sulphur dioxide 0.3 ppm at 2.2 m above finish floor level
SMDB
Entry ducts
fire suppression system (inert gas type)
4000mm.
150 X50 mm Power cable tray
13A Twin Socket From Utility

Power with dedicated circuit breaker
Smoke Detector connected to BMS
DC Clean earth bar 450X100 mm HDG cable tray under raised floor
AC Clean earth bar
13A Twin Socket From

Riser shaft
Utility Power with dedicated
circuit breaker
3000mm.
Fire Alarm Panel
900mm.
2 x handheld CO2
cylinder extinguishers
13A Twin Socket fed from utility power at
2.2 m above finish floor level 150X50 mm power cable tray
SMDB
fire suppression system
(inert gas type)
13A twin socket fed from utility

13A twin socket fed from utility power with dedicated circuit breaker
3000mm.
power with dedicated circuit breaker
DC clean earth bar
AC clean earth bar
Smoke Detector connected to BMS
Riser shaft Entry ducts
450X100 mm HDG cable tray under raised floor
3000mm.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Main telecom room layouts and electrical single line diagram Home consolidation cabinet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Office consolidation cabinet

Mobile service room
Floor telecom closet (2 x 2m)
900mm. 2 x handheld CO2

13 A twin socket fed cylinder extinguishers
from utility power with
dedicated circuit breaker
13 A twin socket fed
from utility power with
63A three phase Isolator dedicated circuit breaker
fed from essential
building power
Smoke Detector
3000mm.
connected to BMS
DC Clean earth bar
AC Clean earth bar
Riser Shaft
3000mm.
Roof top mobile service room
Floor telecom closet (2 x 1m)

APPENDIX 5 – containment capacity guidelines APPENDIX 6 – separation from power sources
CABLE TRAYS AND TRUNKING – CAT6 All pathways supporting telecommunications cabling must comply with the minimum separation
distances specified in TIA-568-B and TIA-569-A. A summary from these standards is shown below:
In a number of places this document gives specific sizes for containment systems. Where this is not .
possible the building developer needs to calculate appropriate size for the containment system. The
Minimum Separation Distance from Power Source <480V
following table gives maximum carrying capacities at installation for a range of containment
dimensions. Containment systems must be no more than 60% utilised when first installed. These
figures are based on a cable diameter of 5.893mm. Condition <2kVA 2-5kVA >5kVA
Unshielded power lines or

electrical equipment in
Cable tray dimensions Trunking dimensions 130mm 300mm 600mm
CAT6 cable capacity proximity to open or non-
(WxH) (WxH) metal pathways
50 x 50 50mm x 50mm 55 Unshielded power lines or
electrical equipment in
75 x 50 50mm x 75mm 82 65mm 150mm 300mm
proximity to grounded
100 x 50 50mm x 100mm 110 metal conduit pathway
Power lines enclosed in a
150 x 50 75mm x 100mm 165
grounded metal conduit (or
200 x 50 100mm x 100mm 220 equivalent shielding (in 50mm 150mm 300mm
300 x 50 150mm x 150mm 330 proximity to grounded
metal conduit pathway)
450 x 50 150mm x 150mm 495 Transformers and Electric
1000mm 1000mm 1000mm
600 x 50 - 660 Motors
900 x 50 - 990
Fluorescent lighting 300mm 300mm 300mm
CONDUIT CAPACITY – CAT6
Where CAT6 cables are installed through conduit it is essential that spare capacity is left for the
removal and replacement of cables. The table below gives the recommended maximum initial
number of CAT6 cables to be installed in popular conduit sizes. This is based on a CAT6 cable
diameter of 5.893mm.
Nominal conduit Nominal conduit Internal diameter Maximum initial

diameter (inches) diameter (mm) (mm) number of CAT6
cables
1 25 25.40 5
1¼ 32 34.04 10
2 50 51.31 22

APPENDIX 7 – cabling infrastructure standards and regulations APPENDIX 8 – Entry boxes layouts
All category 6 (CAT6) and Category 3 (CAT3) infrastructure must comply with Telecommunications
Industry Association TIA-568-B
All fibre optic must be single mode and comply with International Telecommunication Union -
Telecommunication Standardization Sector ITU-T G.652
All cables and components must be tested to confirm compliance with the above specification. For
copper this should be through the use of power meter trace testing and for fibre optic cables through
the use of Optical Time-Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) testing.
Other recommended standards and useful sources of information for designing cabling system are
listed below:
• Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards ANSI/TIA 568-B.1, General

requirements, May 2001
• Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards ANSI/TIA 568-B.2, Balanced
Twisted Pair Cabling Components, May 2001
• Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards ANSI/TIA 568-B.3, Optical
Fibre Cabling Components standards, April 2000
• Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair
Components - Addendum 1 - Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm
Category 6 Cabling (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1-2002)
• Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements
- Addendum 4 - Recognition of Category 6 and 850 nm Laser-Optimized 50/125 µm
Multimode Optical Fibre Cabling (ANSI/TIA-568-B.1-4-2003)
• Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: General Requirements
- Addendum 6 – Category 6 related component test procedures (ANSI/TIA-568-B.2-6-2003)
• EIA/TIA-569-B - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and JRC 12 details
Spaces, October 2004
• International Standards Organization/International Electro technical Commission (ISO/IEC)
ISO/IEC 11801:2002
• ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A: Administration standard for Commercial Buildings
Telecommunications Infrastructure
• BICSI Telecommunication Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 10th Edition: 2003
• Telecommunications Industry Association Technical Information Notice 012 10.04.01
Cabling Installation Planning & Practices Inside Buildings – Segregation of Power & Data
Circuits
• Underwriters Laboratories (UL ) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program
• CENELEC EN50173: 2002
• CENELEC EN 50174 Part 1
• CENELEC EN 50174 Part 2
• American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
• Local Electrical Regulations
• The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
JRC 14 details

COMMONLY USED ABBREVIATIONS
AWG American Wire Gauge
CAT3 Category 3
CAT6 Category 6
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EITC Emirates Integrated Telecommunications Company PJSC
EMI Electro-magnetic Interference
FTTH Fibre to the Home
HDG Hot -Dip Galvanized
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ISO International Standard Organisation
ITU International Telecommunication Union
JRC Joint-box Reinforced Carriageway (type of manhole)
NOC No Objection Certificate
PDU Power Distribution Unit
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
Building infrastructure standards – V4 - 32 - www.du.ae


SECTION – 16124 - 2
TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV SYSTEMS
The Contractor shall supply and install a Telephone and Cable TV system as described below
and in compliance with the requirements detailed in the drawings. All works shall be carried
out in strict compliance with the current rules, regulations and recommendations of the local
DU office.
1. GENERAL
1.1. The works shall comprise supply and installation of DU cables Entry box,
Entry pipes, cable pull boxes and Main and Sub-main distribution frames
respectively for the Telephone and Cable TV systems.
1.2. Prior to commencing any installation works, the Contractor shall coordinate
with the local DU office for approval of internal distribution of telephone
cables.
1.3. All materials and equipment used in the installation shall be approved by the
local DU office.
1.4. The Contractor shall submit, for Engineer’s study and approval, equipment
schedule and comprehensive wiring and riser diagram of the system prior to
commencing any installation works.
1.5. Earth resistance at Entry box and in Telephone rooms shall not exceed 5
ohms.
2. MAIN AND SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
2.1. All distribution frames shall be corrosion resistant, fully enclosed, dust and
vermin proof and complete with hinged doors, lock and key. These shall be
constructed from high-quality sheet steel or fibre glass and shall be approved
by the local office of DU.
2.2. Adequate and safe working space shall be provided around each distribution frame
which shall not be installed near any electrical distribution boards.
2.3. Dimensions of distribution boards, equipped with hinged aluminium doors and
installed on wall with bottom 1 m AFFL, shall be as follows :
(a) 115 mm x 165 mm x 65 mm (depth) for 10/20 pairs of cables.
(b) 160 mm x 210 mm x 90 mm (depth) for 50 pairs of cables.
(c) 210 mm x 320 mm x 120 mm (depth) for 100 pairs of cables.
(d) 600 mm 600 mm x 150 mm (depth) for over 100 pairs of cables.
3. CONDUITS AND TRUNKING

3.1. Following conduits shall be supplied and installed in compliance with the
recommendations of DU :

Telephone and Cable TV Systems
4 No. 100 mm diameter uPVC Entry pipes from in-take position on the
premises to the Main Distribution Frame in the ground floor Telephone
room. The conduits shall be complete with 6 mm diameter nylon ropes or 2.5
mm diameter copper draw wires. The Entry pipes shall be laid at a depth of
60 cms from the finished ground level and shall be protected by concrete
under all permanent paved surfaces.
3.2. Prior to installation the Contractor shall determine from DU the precise
diameter and sizes of conduits and trays recommended by them for the
project.
4. TELEPHONE ROOMS
4.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the earthing in the Telephone Rooms rooms
do not exceed 5 ohms.
4.2. The Telephone rooms shall be clean, dust-free, well-lit and air-conditioned.
4.3. No other services lines, conduits etc. shall pass under the telephone floor.
5. MANHOLES
Telephone manholes shall be 600 mm x 600 mm x 850 mm and shall be complete

with heavy duty mild steel covers engraved with markings “TELEPHONE CABLES”
/ “CABLE TV CABLES”

Telephone and Cable TV Systems
SECTION -16141
WIRING ACCESSORIES.
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect complete small power installations
inclusive of lighting switches, contactor switches, flush socket outlets, industrial type socket
outlets and other wiring accessories etc., all in strict compliance with these Specifications,
drawings and Schedules for Wiring Accessories.
1. GENERAL.
1.1. All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with cable sizes and circuit
details given in respective load schedules and drawings.
1.2. All wiring of multi-point sub-circuits shall be carried out as a “loop-in”
system. No joints in any point in the wiring run shall be permitted.
1.3. Wiring for small power circuits shall be run in separate dedicated
conduits/trunking back to their respective final MCB distribution boards.
Circuits supplied from different phases shall not be housed in the same
conduit. Care shall be exercised to ensure both the live and the neutral
conductors of a circuit shall in all cases be contained in the same conduit.
1.4. Every single pole switch and MCB in a two-wire circuit shall be connected to
the phase conductor. Every single phase circuit shall have its own neutral and
earth connections taken from its respective final distribution board.
1.5. Wiring for each circuit run in trunking shall be taped and bound at intervals
throughout the entire length and shall be labelled at each junction and terminal
point for easy identification of circuits.
1.6. Prior to drawing wiring in conduits/trunking, the entire system inclusive of
outlet boxes, isolators, MCB distribution boards etc. shall be completed and
inspected. Any conduits/trunking not accepted by the Engineer shall be
replaced without additional charges.
1.7. The Contractor shall pay special attention to the segregation of L.V. wiring
and respective E.L.V. wiring for Fire Detection and Voice Alarm System,
CCTV and Card Access System, Telephone and Cable TV system, SMATV
System and other E.L.V systems, to ensure no adverse interaction shall occur
between the various systems. All installation works shall strictly comply with
the requirements of BS7671:2001 (I.E.E.Wiring Regulations).
1.8. Colour code and identification of cable/wiring cores shall be in compliance
with the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority’s Regulations.
1.9. All wiring accessories shall be as described and specified in the respective
schedules of equipment. Samples of each type of wiring accessory and other
related equipment shall be submitted for Engineer’s final approval prior to
placing orders for the same.
File: ELECSPEC16141.doc ) Page 1 of 4

Wiring Accessories
2. WIRING ACCESSORIES.
2.1. SWITCHES.
2.1.1. All lighting control switches complying with the requirements of BS

3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000 shall be of quick-make slow-break
type suitable for operating AC inductive loads. These shall be of 5A,
6A, 10A, 15A or 16A ratings and shall include single-pole, double-
pole, 1-way, 2-way and intermediate switches. These shall generally be
flush-mounted at a height of 1.2 m above FFL and shall be complete
with galvanized steel boxes of same manufacture. Earth terminals shall
be provided on each switch box.
2.1.2. All 20A DP switches for controlling water heaters, hand dryers and
like equipment shall conform to the requirements of BS 3676-1:2000,
BS EN 60669-1:2000.
2.1.3 All electronic variable dimmer control switches for tungsten filament
and low-voltage lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS
5518:1977.
2.1.4. All grid modular switching system complying with the requirements of
BS 5733:1995 shall be complete with 10A/20A SP/DP, 1-way/2-way
etc. switch modules, indicator units, dimmer switches, accessory
modules, front plates, mounting frames and other accessories in
compliance with details in drawings.
3. PLUGS, SOCKET OUTLETS, CONNECTION UNITS, ADAPTORS, AND

FLEX OUTLET PLATES
3.1. All rewirable and non-rewirable 13A fused plugs shall comply with the
3.2. All general purpose 13A switched and unswitched socket outlets shall be of 3-
pin shuttered type, with or without neon indicators as called for and described
in Wiring Accessories Schedule, all complying with the requirements of BS
1363-2:1995.
These shall generally be connected either in radial or in ring circuits as
indicated in the drawings and load schedules for final respective MCB
distribution boards. Connection to the phase and neutral conductors shall be
carefully made in compliance with the manufacturer’s markings and the earth
pin shall be effectively earthed.
These shall generally be mounted 0.45 m above FFL in general areas, and 0.3
m above tables in working areas such as kitchens, pantry, computer rooms etc.
Domestic flush type and industrial metal clad surface type shall be specified
for different areas as shown in the drawings and as indicated in the schedule of
Wiring Accessories and materials.
3.3. All adaptors shall comply with the requirements of BS 1363-3:1995.

Wiring Accessories
3.4. All 13A switched and unswitched fused connection units shall comply with
the requirements of BS 1363-4:1995.
3.5. All industrial socket-outlets, plugs and connectors shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4343:1992, BS EN 60309-2:1992.
3.6. All flex outlet plates shall be equipped with three pairs of terminals and a cord
grip and shall comply with the requirements of BS 5733:1995.
4. 20A/32A GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROL UNITS
20A and 32A control units with or without neon indicators complying with the
requirements of BS 3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000 shall be used to
control hand dryers, window type A/C units etc.
6. DP FUSED CONNECTION UNITS.
All DP switched and unswitched connection units indicated in the drawings

shall comply with the requirements of BS 3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000.
These shall generally be of flush type complete with 20A DP switches (where
applicable), 13 A fuse-links to BS 1362:1973, flex outlets to BS 5733:1995,
neon indicators and mounting boxes.
7. CEILING ROSES
All ceiling roses shall comply with the requirements of BS 67:1987.
8. JUNCTION BOXES.
All junction boxes shall comply with the requirements of BS 6220:1983.

These shall have either 4 or 3 terminal blocks, 10A/30A rating, accepting 4/6
6.0 sq. mm single core cables.
9. TV/FM CO-OXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS.
Direct connection and isolated TV/FM co-axial socket-outlets shall comply

with the requirements of BS 5733:1995, BS 3041, IEC 60169.
These shall generally be suitable for use in multi-outlet aerial system,
providing necessary safety isolation rated 2000 V AC to BS EN 60065:1998.
These outlets shall be designed for UHF/VHF and VHF/FM radio signals
reception.
10. LINE JACK TELEPHONE OUTLETS.
These shall be of the type approved by the local ETISALAT Office.
11. TELEPHONE AND DATA SOCKET-OUTLETS

Wiring Accessories
These shall be of modular system design with a wide range of socket modules
for telephone and data use and shall be equipped with matching front plates
designed to accept combinations of interchangeable modules.
Telephone sockets shall comply with the requirements of BS 6312-2.1:1994,
BS EN 6312-2.2:1997 and Data socket modules shall comply with the
requirements of BS 5733:1995, or other relevant applicable Standards.
12. PLATE FINISHES OF ACCESSORIES
In general, plate finishes of wiring accessories in various locations shall be as follows:

i) In Majlis/Reception Area Bronze
ii) General Offices, Stores, corridors, Regular white PVC.
Service rooms.
iii) Underfloor trunking in Main Library, Children’s Matching Accessories
Multimedia, Main Library Multimedia, Café etc.
iv) Plant Room and other similar areas To IP 65
13. MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT
Unless instructed otherwise by Architect and Engineer, the mounting height of the
various wiring accessories and electrical equipment shall be as follows :
i) Lighting and other control switches 1250 mm AFFL

ii) Socket outlets, telephone line jacks,
TV socket outlets etc. 450 mm AFFL
iii) Socket outlets, isolators for FCU’s Adjacent to respective
unit.
iv) Connection units, flexible outlets etc. Adjacent to units
being served
v) Fire Alarm breakglass 1250 mm AFFL
vi) Fire Alarm Control Panel,
MCB distribution boards 1800 mm AFFL

Wiring Accessories
SECTION - 16170
EARTHING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect a complete earthing system comprising
necessary earthing electrodes, earth bars, earth electrode cables, earth electrode inspection
housing, protective conductors, connections and any other components and accessories
deemed necessary for a highly reliable, safe and satisfactory earthing system to the approval
of the Dubai Electricity and Water Authority, DEWA.
1. GENERAL.
1.1. The installation of the earthing system shall comply with the requirements of
BS 7671:2001 (IEE Wiring regulations) and BS 7430:1998 entitled “Code of
Practice for Earthing”. Should the regulations and recommendations detailed
in the aforementioned standards differ in any way with those of DEWA, the
requirements and recommendations of the latter shall be adhered to.
1.2. The main L.V earthing system shall comprise earth electrodes installed at
suitable locations near the sub-station / Main Electrical room. Appropriate sized
copper earthing conductor shall connect the earthing electrodes to main copper
earth bars, which shall be installed in the sub-station/main electrical rooms.
Frames of all items of L.V. switchgear, all earthing conductors etc. shall in turn
be connected to the main earth bar.
2. EARTHING ELECTRODES.
2.1. Tests for soil resistivity shall be carried out in areas where earth electrodes
are to be installed.
2.2. In areas of high soil resistivity it may be necessary to install more than one
earth electrode. In such cases the electrodes shall be at least 6 m apart with
the necessary couplers connecting them.
2.3. The number of earth electrodes and their types, diameter, length, setting
depth and the method of installation shall be in complete conformity with the
aforementioned standards and with the requirements of the Dubai Electricity
and Water Authority. The earth electrode/s resistance shall not exceed 1.0
ohm or the value recommended by DEWA.
2.4. In general, the earth electrodes shall be driven to a minimum depth of 3 m or
0.3 m below permanent water level. The earth electrodes shall comprise
minimum 16 mm diameter hard drawn copper rods complete with hardened
steel tip, driving cap and phosphor bronze coupling suitable for the required
size of copper earth conductor.
2.5. The copper earth conductor shall connect the earth electrodes to the main earth
bar via a test clamp to be located 0.6 m above F.F.L.

Earthing System
3. MAIN EARTH BAR.
In general the main earth bar shall comprise a 65 x 10 mm high-conductivity copper

bars. 25 x 4.75 mm copper strips shall connect all items of L.V. equipment in the
sub-station/ Main Electrical room to the main earth bar.
4. EARTH ELECTRODE CABLES
The earth electrode cable shall be PVC sheathed standard copper conductor of
appropriate cross-sectional area. The cable shall connect the earth electrode/s to the
main earth bar. One end of the cable shall be sweated into a lug and connected to the
main earth bar with 16 mm (minimum) diameter brass bolts with 3 brass washers and
two brass lock nuts. The other end shall be connected to the earthing electrode/s in
compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of earth electrodes.
5. EARTH ELECTRODES INSPECTION HOUSING.
A concrete inspection housing with a heavy duty hinged cast iron cover and frame
made in a pit 300 x 300 x 300 mm shall be provided for each earth electrode
connection. A permanent label marked with the words “SAFETY ELECTRICAL
EARTH - DO NOT REMOVE” shall be provided at each connection.
6. ITEMS TO BE EARTHED.
6.1. All metal parts of every electrical equipment shall be connected to the
earthing system. Metal parts of items of electrical equipment to be earthed
shall include, but shall not be limited to, switchgear, metal armour of cables,
metal conduits, trunking, trays, accessories, outlet boxes, motor and pump
casings, metal sinks, pipework, plant accessories, lighting fixtures, switch
plates, socket outlets etc. which are wholly or partly encased in metal.
6.2. As described above, all items in the system shall be effectively earthed so that
these are continuously electrically conductive. The electrical resistance at any
point in the system to earth shall not exceed 1 ohm, or the value stipulated by
DEWA.
6.3. The neutral conductor shall not be earthed any where within the complex.
6.4. The earthing of water mains and other service lines shall be carried out in
strict compliance with the recommendations of BS 7671:2001.
7. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS.
Cross-sectional areas of protective conductors in relation to the cross-sectional area

of associated phase conductors shall be in compliance with Table 54G of
BS7671:2001.
8. CONNECTIONS.
8.1. All joints in copper shall be carried out using a system of compression
jointing.

Earthing System
8.2. Bolted connections shall be of the multiple bolt type. Bolts, washers and stop
nuts shall be of copper alloy, everdur, durium, duronze, or silicon bronze.
Ferrous hardware shall not be used. Where bare copper is jointed by bolting,
contact surfaces shall be silver plated.

Earthing System

SECTION - 16411
LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION PANEL
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission, in the main L.V.
Electrical room, an Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel, designated PFCP, of kVAr
rating as called for and as indicated in the single line power distribution schematic drawing
and in the load schedules for respective Main Distribution Board, MDB.
Unless stated otherwise, the PFCP shall not form an integral part of the Main
Distribution Board.
The PFCP shall comprise a robust enclosure equipped with and complete with main
incoming isolating switch, an electronic power factor regulator/controller, power factor
improvement capacitors, contactors, fuses and any other components and accessories
deemed necessary for a high quality, high-performance, reliable and safe power factor
correction equipment.
The components of PFCP shall be selected and designed to ensure that the power factor
of the system is maintained at a minimum value of 0.9 lag, or a value stipulated by
DEWA, for all loads up to full load of the system. In addition, each PFCP shall be
equipped with harmonic suppression reactors.
1. GENERAL
In general the PFCP shall conform to the following specifications and requirements:
1.1. The PFCP shall be factory built and shall be of modular cubicle pattern, floor
mounted, free standing, air-insulated, totally enclosed type, and shall, in
addition, be corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply with the requirements
of BS 60439 - 1:1999. Minimum degree of protection shall be IP 54.
1.2. The PFCP shall be constructed of highest-quality corrosion-resistant sheet
steel of adequate thickness, coated with an approved compound to provide
excellent resistance against scratches and corrosion.
1.3. The PFCP shall be designed for total front access, and provision shall be made
for bottom/top entry for the main incoming cable and shall be complete with
cable box, cable gland, lug, clamps etc. The PFCP shall be of suitable design
to facilitate ease of cabling, maintenance, inspection and testing, and shall
ensure maximum safety to operators, and to maintenance and testing
personnel.
1.4. ON/OFF/AUTO switches shall be provided mounted flush on the panel.

Low Voltage Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel
2. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS.
2.1. Highly reliable low-loss (0.5 watts per kVAr) capacitors with self-healing
properties shall be used in the system.
2.2. The capacitors shall be environmentally acceptable using non-toxic
impregnants.
2.3. Each step shall be designed for 25/50 kVAr rating or as specified in the
distribution schematic drawing and load schedule/s for main distribution
board/s.
2.4. All capacitors shall be derated to give design capacitance at 50 deg. C.
2.5. Each capacitor unit shall comprise requisite number of individual capacitor
elements. These elements shall be manufactured from impregnated metallized
polypropylene or metallized paper and plastic film and have self-healing
property. Each unit shall be fitted with a thermal protection device.
2.6. The safety protection system shall incorporate a fail-safe device for each
capacitor element.
2.7. Suitable discharge resistors shall be provided to ensure capacitor terminal
voltage shall be reduced to 50 volts in one minute after switching off.
2.8. All capacitors used in the system shall be of 600/1000 V insulation grade and
shall comply with the requirements, including latest amendments, of BS
1650:1971, IEC 831.
2.9. All capacitors shall be designed to withstand the following overloads:
Overload tolerance : 6-7 % permanently.
: 15 % 8 hours per day.
3. POWER FACTOR REGULATOR/CONTROL GEAR.
3.1. The function of the Regulator/Control gear shall be to monitor the network
reactive power and to achieve the required power factor by switching ON and
OFF capacitor steps.
The Regulator/Control gear shall be microprocessor controlled, of compact
design and insensitive to harmonics.
3.2. The equipment shall incorporate a special fast acting soft switching contactor
arrangement to minimize the adverse affects of high inrush currents and
system disturbances caused by capacitor switching. Each kVAr step shall be
controlled by two contactors switching in cascade. These contactors shall
incorporate a pre-connection resistor system which reduces to a minimum the
effect of current inrush. 100 A circuit fuses shall be installed to protect each
50 kVAr capacitor step and its associated control gear.
3.3. The Regulator/Control gear shall be designed and equipped with components
to provide the following features and facilities :
-- Adjustment of power factor setting from 0.7 lag to 0.9 lead.
-- Switching time between steps from 1 to 100 seconds.
-- No-volt release which instantly disconnects the automatic capacitor banks in the event
of mains supply failure. With the return of mains voltage the capacitor banks shall be
switched ON after 90 seconds. This feature shall be available for both AUTO and
MANUAL operations.
-- Facility for Automatic and Manual operation.
-- Programming of different switching sequences.

-- LED indication of capacitive and inductive load and the number of
steps energized.
-- Automatic adjustment to changes in network frequency.
-- ON/OFF/AUTO switches with multistage switching facility
-- The Regulator/ Control gear shall be equipped with the following:
(i) 1 No. digital power factor meter covering a scale 0.7 lead-1-0.7
lagging.
(ii) Fault indicator to give alarm when the selected power factor
value is not reached within a period of 5 minutes, and in the
event of mains supply failure.
4. MAIN INCOMING ISOLATOR/LOAD BREAK-SWITCH.
4.1. These shall be complete with effective arc splitting plates and self-cleaning
contacts and shall be designed for positive opening and manual operation, all
in compliance with the requirements of BS EN 60947 - 3 : 1999.
4.2. The main incoming isolator/load break switch shall be of 600/1000 V
insulation grade designed and rated for the required capacitive switching duty
and rated impulse withstand voltage of 12 kV.
5. CONTACTORS.
5.1. The Contactors shall be designed to withstand large transient current peaks at
high frequency of several kHz, which could occur during switching of capacitor
banks. The manufacturer shall submit calculations for the largest peak current the
proposed contactor will be able to make.
5.2. The Contactors shall have an electrical life time of 100,000 operations, and shall
be rated at 1.5 times normal rated current of capacitor banks.
5.3. The Contactors shall be designed and constructed to comply with the
requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 60947 - 4 - 1:2001.
6. HBC FUSES.
All low voltage fuses shall be current-limiting types of modern industrial design having
high breaking capacity to comply with the requirements of BS 88, BS EN 60269.

SECTION - 16426
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR. MAIN,

SUB-MAIN AND FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.
ISOLATORS AND LOAD-BREAK SWITCHES
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission all items of electrical
switchgear in approximate locations indicated in the drawings, all in compliance with these
Specifications and details in single line power distribution schematic drawing and in load
schedule for respective distribution boards. All busbars, active components and accessories
shall be designed for satisfactory operation in ambient temperature of 50 degrees C.
1. MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD ( MDB )
1.1. GENERAL
1.1.1. The main L.V. Distribution Board, designated MDB, shall be of

600/1000V insulation grade and shall be designed and constructed to
comply with the requirements of BS EN 60439- 1:1999. The board
shall be factory built and all busbar sections shall be designed and
certified to withstand short-circuit of 50 kA for 1 second.
1.1.2. The board shall be of modular cubicle pattern, floor mounted, air
insulated, totally enclosed, fully interlocked, and, unless specified
otherwise, shall be segregated to comply with the requirements of
Form 4, Type 6 as specified in the aforementioned Standards. The
board/s shall be vermin, corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply
with the degree of protection IP 43 as defined in BS EN 60439-2 -
2000.
1.1.3. The board shall be constructed of minimum 2 mm thick highest quality
corrosion resistant hot dipped electro-galvanized steel sheets,
pretreated and coated with an approved compound of minimum
thickness 90 microns to provide excellent resistance against corrosion
and scratches. The board/s shall be designed to facilitate extension at
either end, and shall allow for interchangeability of switchgear.
Provision shall be made for top or bottom entries for cables as
appropriate. All necessary cable boxes, lugs, glands, clamps etc.
appropriate to cable sizes shall be provided. The board/s shall be of
suitable design to facilitate ease of cabling, maintenance, inspection
and testing, and shall ensure maximum safety to operators, and to
maintenance and testing personnel. All panel doors shall be
mechanically interlocked to prevent opening before the gear is
isolated.
1.1.4. The general arrangement of the board shall be indicated in the
appropriate drawing. However, it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to submit with his working drawings, for the Engineer’s

Low Voltage Electrical Swichgear Main, Sub-Main and Final
Distribution Board, Isolators and Load Break Switches
study and approval, the arrangement and physical layout of the board/s
together with the manufacturer’s Specifications and full technical
details of the switchgear and all ancillary equipment he proposes to
use. The Contractor shall ensure that his offer shall include all items,
whether or not explicitly specified, but which are deemed necessary for
a complete, safe and satisfactory switchgear installation. The
Contractor shall also ensure that the board offered shall be of suitable
dimensions for the location specified. A complete set of plans
indicating details and fixing dimensions together with necessary
number of foundation bolts for the board shall be submitted.
1.1.5. If necessary, the board shall be arranged for delivery to site in sections
which can be easily placed into positions and then bolted together.
Lifting lugs shall be provided for each section. The board/s shall be
installed complete in all respects and shall be tested and commissioned
to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer.
1.1.6. The manufacturer of the proposed board shall submit, through the
Contractor, copies of Type Test Report from an independent, reputable
and recognized testing authority like ASTA, KEMA or other members
of LOVAG confirming that the short-circuit and temperature-rise tests
on the boards shall be satisfactory and in compliance with the
requirements of BS EN 60439.
Test Reports shall also be submitted to confirm that the dielectric
properties, effectiveness and short-circuit strength of protective
circuits, clearances and creepage distances and degree of protection of
the board are satisfactory.
1.1.7. The manufacturer shall provide a mimic single line distribution
schematic of the distribution system applicable to the MDB, to the
approval of the Engineer.
1.1.8. Each board shall be equipped with anti-condensation heater allowing
relative humidity settings between 50% to 100%.
1.2. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (A.C.B)
1.2.1. All A.C.B.s shall be designed to have a rated service short-circuit

breaking capacity of not less than 50 kA rms and shall conform to the
requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 60947-1:2004
and BS EN 60947-2:2003. Fault tests shall be carried out on all the
breakers appropriate to service rating of utilization category of the
aforementioned Standard. The thermal and short-circuit ratings of the
circuit-breakers shall be the enclosed ratings relating to the ambient
temperature of 50 degrees C and environment in which the circuit-
breaker shall operate in service, and not the rating in free air.
Performance tests and certificates together with applicable de-rating
curves of the breakers shall be submitted.
1.2.2. All A.C.B.s shall be of the withdrawable type, and the operating
mechanism shall be hand operated spring assisted type to enable the
closing speed to be independent of the operator.
1.2.3. All A.C.B.s shall have main contacts of the multifinger type with
individual self-aligning springs for high contact pressure. Isolating

contacts shall be of the removable, silver-plated, multifinger, spring-
loaded cluster type to ensure perfect alignments at all times.
1.2.4. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with effective and adequately designed
arc chutes and arc shields which shall enclose all current breaking
contacts and shall be designed for effective and fast arc chopping. The
complete chute assembly shall be capable of being easily removed for
routine inspection of the chutes and contacts. The moving portion of
each circuit-breaker shall comprise a three-pole circuit-breaker with
operating mechanism, primary and secondary disconnection devices,
auxiliary switches, position indicators and necessary control wiring,
all mounted on a robust steel framework. This framework and all
metal parts of the moving portion, apart from current carrying parts,
shall, when inserting the circuit-breaker into the cubicle, be solidly
earthed before the circuit-breaker reaches test position. The circuit-
breaker shall then be effectively earthed when it is in the cubicle.
1.2.5. All A.C.B.s shall have provision for earthing the outgoing terminals
after withdrawals. A complete set of earthing units for earthing
purposes shall be provided. Provision shall be made for padlocking the
breakers in “OFF” and “EARTH” positions. To prevent access to live
connections, all orifices shall be covered by lockable type safety
shutters of insulated material when the breaker is completely
withdrawn or when it is in the inspection position. Shutters shall be
operated mechanically in the closed and open positions when the
breaker is racked in and out.
All A.C.B.s shall have three distinct positions as follows :
i) Fully inserted position.
ii) Test position.
iii) Isolated position.
1.2.6. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with high accuracy solid state
microprocessor based protection devices to provide the following
protection functions :
i) Protection against overload.
ii) Selective protection against short-circuit.
iii) Instantaneous protection against short-circuit.
iv) Protection against earth fault.
1.2.7. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with highly reliable mechanical and
electrical interlocking devices to prevent any maloperation.
1.2.8. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with the following devices and
indicators :
i) Charging lever for the closing spring.
ii) Spring charged/ spring released indicators.
iii) A.C.B. ON/OFF indicators.
iv) Padlocks for A.C.B. in the CONNECTED, TEST or
ISOLATED positions.
v) Push button for releasing the moving part of drawout circuit
breaker.

1.3. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B.)
1.3.1. All M.C.C.B.s protecting outgoing feeder circuits shall be of the

instantaneous type and shall be designed and constructed to have short-
circuit breaking capacity of not less than 30 kA for MDB fed from a
1000 kVA transformer, and not less than 35 kA for MDB fed from a
1500 transformer. All M.C.C.B.s shall be fixed type and shall conform
to the requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 60947-
2:2003.
1.3.2. All M.C.C.B.s shall be of thermal-magnetic, manually and
automatically operated type, and shall be designed to provide positive
trip-free operation on abnormal overloads with quick-break contacts
for both manual and automatic operation. Adequate protection for the
stationary and movable contacts shall be provided with rapid and
effective arc interrupting devices. An inverse time-delay thermal
overcurrent trip element and a magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip
element shall be provided on each pole of the breaker for common
tripping of all poles.
1.3.3. All MCCBs shall be designed for operating at ambient temperature of
50 degrees C.
1.4. BUSBARS
1.4.1. Busbars of adequate current-carrying capacity of highest conductivity

hard drawn electrolytic copper complying with the requirements of
BS EN 60439-1:1999 shall be rigidly fixed on insulating supports to
withstand short-circuit mechanical and thermal stresses. Reduced
section neutral busbars shall not be allowed. All busbars shall be
designed for operation in 50 deg. C.
1.4.2. The busbars shall be air-insulated, air-spaced, fully shielded with
barriers and seals between adjacent cubicle compartments. All joints
shall be carefully prepared, cleaned and treated to prevent oxide
formation. In addition, all connections and joints shall be fully
shrouded and insulated.
1.4.3. The busbars system may comprise horizontal and vertical sections
together with the earth bar. Safe distances, based on air insulation,
shall be maintained between adjacent phase busbars.
1.4.4. The horizontal busbars shall be located in a separate screened
compartment at the top of the board to offer optimum ventilation
requirements. The busbars shall be supported, connected and
protected to ensure they are able to withstand the severe dynamic
forces generated in the event of a short-circuit.
1.4.5. The vertical busbars shall be anchored to the horizontal busbars a
manner to allow them to expand and contract freely without
generating machanical stresses in the structure.
1.4.6. Cross-sectional area of the neutral bar shall be the same as that for the
phase busbars.
1.4.7. The earth bar shall be electrically and mechanically connected to the
frame by clamps.
1.5. INSTRUMENTS AND METERS
1.5.1. Three numbers suitably scaled moving iron type ammeters conforming
to the requirements of BS 89-2:1990, BS EN 60051-2:1989 shall be
flush mounted on the panel. (Digital Type)
1.5.2. One number suitably scaled moving iron type voltmeter conforming to
the requirements of BS 89-2:1990, BS EN 60051-2:1989, together with
an integral phase shift switch, shall be mounted flush on the panel. The
voltmeter shall be fused protected. (Digital Type)
1.5.3. One number suitably scaled moving iron type power factor meter
conforming to the requirements of BS 89-5:1990, BS EN 60051-5:
1989 shall be flush mounted on the panel. (Digital Type)
1.5.4. One number kilo-watt-hour meter suitable for three phase integrated
unbalanced load, conforming to the requirements of BS 5685-1:1979,
BS EN 60687:1993 shall be flush mounted on the panel. (Digital
recommended)
1.5.5. The Contractor shall ascertain from DEWA whether additional
instruments, other than those described above, would be required. The
Contractor shall fulfil all their requirements and place orders
accordingly. (Digital Type)
1.6. METERING AND PROTECTIVE TRANSFORMERS
1.6.1. All current transformers shall be insulated with the best available
materials and shall be capable of continuous and prolonged service
without deterioration. The windings shall be designed and constructed
to withstand the severe effects of thermal and mechanical stresses of
short-circuit currents.
1.6.2. Each C.T.s secondary wiring shall be earthed on one side through a
removable link. In the event C.T.s are connected in a star
configuration, the star [point shall be earthed via a removable link.
1.6.3. Each Current Transformer shall be equipped with a shorting link.
Shorting links shall be provided for each Current transformer.
1.6.4. Metering and protective current transformers shall conform to the
requirements of BS 7626:1993 and shall be adequately rated to meet
their respective burdens.
1.7. INTERNAL AND AUXILIARY WIRING
Internal and auxiliary fire-proof pvc-insulated cables complying with the

requirements of BS 6231:1998 shall be used for all switchgear and controlgear
wiring. All wiring shall be protected against mechanical damage.
1.8. TOOLS AND SAFETY ACCESSORIES
1.8.1. To facilitate satisfactory and proper maintenance of board/s, the

Contractor shall supply a complete set of tools recommended by the
manufacturer.

1.8.2. For safety, the Contractor shall provide full length rubber mattress in
front of each board.
1.8.3. The Contractor shall provide Warning Signs on L.V room doors and
Access Panels.
1.9. LABELLING.
The incoming and every outgoing feeder cubicle shall be labelled both in
Arabic and in English languages, by means of approved name plates, screw
fixed to the cubicle doors.
2. SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD/S (SMDBs)
2.1. GENERAL.
2.1.1. The sub-main distribution boards, designated SMDB, shall be of

600/1000 V insulation grade and shall be designed and constructed to
comply with the requirements of BS EN 60439-1:1999 .The boards
shall be factory built and the required busbar short-circuit level for
each SMDB shall be indicated in the distribution schematic drawing.
2.1.2. SMDBs shall generally be of the wall-mounted, air-insulated, totally
enclosed and fully interlocked type with internal separation and
segregation to comply with the requirements of Form 2 as specified in
the aforementioned Standards. The boards shall be ASTA certified and
shall be vermin, corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply with the
degree of protection IP 43.
2.1.3. All SMDBs shall be constructed of highest quality corrosion-resistant
sheet steel of minimum thickness 1.5 mm, with constructional details
identical to those of MDB in item 1.1.3 above, and shall provide
excellent resistance against corrosion and scratches. All necessary
cable boxes, lugs, glands, clamps, etc. appropriate to the cable sizes
shall be provided. The panel doors shall be mechanically interlocked to
prevent opening before the gear is isolated.
2.1.4. All SMDB’s shall be furnished with digital kwh meters for monitoring
purpose.
2.2. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B.)
2.2.1. All M.C.C.B.s protecting outgoing feeders on all SMDBs shall

generally be of fixed type and shall comply with the requirements with
respect to type, construction and operating characteristics detailed in
Item 1.3. above.
2.2.2. All M.C.C.B.s shall conform to the requirements, including latest
amendments, of BS EN 60947-2:2003
2.2.3. The short-circuit breaking capacity of each breaker shall be the busbar
short-circuit withstand level in kA for respective SMDBs as indicated
in the distribution schematic drawing.

2.3. BUSBARS.
Requirements of busbars shall generally comply with the details described

under items 1.4.1, 1.4.2, 1.4.6 and 1.4.7.
3. FINAL MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) DISTRIBUTION

BOARDS
3.1. GENERAL.
3.1.1. The design of final MCB distribution boards shall strictly conform to
the requirements of Dubai Electricity and Water Authority with respect
to busbar sectionalization, number and respective sensitivities of
RCCBs. Other details relating to MCB ratings, phase and CPC wiring
sizes, load phase distribution etc. for various circuits shall be indicated
in load schedules for respective distribution boards.
3.1.2. All boards shall be factory fabricated and shall be constructed of
corrosion-resistant sheet steel of minimum thickness 1.2 mm, coated
with an approved compound, to provide excellent resistance against
corrosion and scratches. All boards shall comply with the
requirements of BS EN 60439-1:1999. All busbars shall be tinned
copper.
3.1.3. All boards shall be of totally enclosed, dust, damp and corrosion proof
type. These boards shall generally be flush mounted type unless
otherwise indicated in the drawings or instructed by the Engineer. Each
board shall be equipped with a robust cover, lock and key. The boards
shall be labelled as previously described and a neatly typed schedule,
placed inside the board, shall indicate all the outgoing final sub-
circuits, their ratings and the areas and points served.
3.2. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)
3.2.1. All MCBs shall be of high performance, rapid interrupting, current

limiting type designed and type-tested to BS EN 60898:2001,
including latest amendments.
3.2.2. All MCBs shall be thermal-magnetic, manually and automatically
operated type to provide positive trip-free operation on abnormal
overloads with quick-break contacts, the thermal element providing
inverse time-delay tripping on abnormal overloads, and the magnetic
element providing instantaneous tripping on short-circuits.
3.2.3. All MCCBs shall be suitable for mounting on rails inside the
enclosure to facilitate removal of one without disturbing the others.
3.2.4. MCBs shall be of type 2 characteristics for general lighting and small
power circuits, and of type 3 characteristics for circuit supplying
pumps, AC units or other equipment using induction motors. Category
of duty shall be M6 or M9 depending on the fault level at the point of
installation.

3.3. RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS ( RCCBs)
3.3.1. In addition to the overcurrent and short-circuit protection provided by

MCBs, protection against electric shocks and earth leakages shall be
provided by residual current operated circuit-breakers of appropriate
sensitivities as indicated in load schedules of respective distribution
boards.
3.3.2. Residual current circuit breakers for household and similar uses shall
be designed and constructed to comply with the requirements BS EN
61008-1:1995, BS EN 61008-2:1995, including latest amendment.
3.3.3. RCCBs with integral overcurrent (RCBOs) for household and similar
uses shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 61009-1:1995, BS
EN 61009-2:1995, including latest amendments.
3.3.4. Sections of the sectionalized busbars providing supply to general purpose
13A socket outlet circuits and water heater circuits shall be protected by
4-pole 30 mA sensitivity RCCBs.
3.3.5. Sectionalized busbars providing supply to washing machines, dish
washing machines, hand dryers and similar equipment circuits shall be
protected by 4-pole 30 mA or 100 mA sensitivity RCCBs as directed by
DEWA.
3.3.6. Appropriate sensitivity 2-pole/4-pole RCCBs shall be provided to protect
circuits supplying power to water pumps, fire fighting pumps, lift
machines and other similar motoring circuits all in compliance with the
current rules, regulations and requirements of DEWA.
4. ISOLATORS, SWITCHES, DISCONNECTORS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS

AND FUSE COMBINATION UNITS
4.1. All isolators and similar units mentioned above shall be of totally enclosed
pattern, corrosion-proof, cast aluminium metal clad type, complete with
ON/OFF indicators, complying with the requirements of BS EN 60947-3:1999
and designed for AC 23 duty.
4.2. Unless otherwise indicated in drawings or load schedules, all isolators shall be
heavy–duty type designed and constructed to provide minimum protection
grade IP 65 as defined in BS EN 60439–1:1999.
4.3. All isolators shall have interlocking features to prevent opening with the
supply in the “ON “ position.
4.4. The current rating and the number of poles for each isolator shall be indicated
in the drawings and load schedules.
5. CONTACTORS
5.1. All contactors shall be of 4-pole design for AC application and shall be type
tested for AC23 duty complying with the requirements of BS EN 60947-
4:2001.
5.2. The contacts shall be of double-break butt-type with with each moving contact
individually spring-loaded.

5.3. All contactors shall be continuously rated and their coils shall be wound on
moulded formers.
5.4. All contactors shall be ambient temperature compensated, factory calibrated
and sealed.
5.5. Each contactor shall be provided with rerquired number of normally-open and
normally closed auxiliary switches.
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

6.1. The Contractor shall submit characteristics of upstream and downstream
circuit breakers to establish satisfactory discrimination between them.
6.2. Prior to despatching from the factory, all MDBs and SMDBs shall be
subjected to the following routine tests in the presence of the Engineer:
i) Primary injection test for all circuit breakers and meters.
ii) Secondary injection tests for all protective relays.
iii) Insulation tests.
iv) Functional tests.
All tests certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer.
6.3. To avoid setting up of eddy currents all single core cables shall enter or leave
any item of metal clad switchgear through the same aperture in the enclosure.
6.4. Special termination arrangements shall be provided for cables whose cross-
sectional area exceeds the circuit breaker terminal size.
6.5. Each electrical room shall be provided with suitable size carbon-free
insulating rubber mat certified to withstand a voltage of 2 kV for one minute.
7. WARRANTIES
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a written guarantee covering the satisfactory
operation of the Low Voltage Electrical Switchgear, Main, Sub-main and Final Distribution
Boards, Isolators and load-break switches for a period of one (1) year after date of acceptance.
During this period, the Contractor shall repair or replace any defective work and pay for any
repair or replacement costs.

SECTION - 16510
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
The Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect complete lighting installations, inclusive
of luminaries, conduits, trunking, sub-circuit wiring, installation accessories etc., all in strict
compliance with these Specifications, drawings, Load Schedules and Schedules for
Luminaires.
1. GENERAL
1.1. All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with cable sizes and circuit
details given in respective load schedules and drawings.
1.2. All wiring of multi-point sub-circuits shall be carried out as a “loop-in”
system. No joints in any point in the wiring run shall be permitted.
1.3. Circuits supplied from different phases shall not be housed in the same
conduit. Care shall be exercised to ensure both the live and the neutral
conductors of a circuit shall in all cases be contained in the same conduit.
1.4. Every single pole switch and MCB in a two-wire circuit shall be connected to
the phase conductor. Every single phase circuit shall have its own neutral and
earth connections taken from its respective final distribution board.
1.5. Wiring for each circuit run in trunking shall be taped and bound at intervals
throughout the entire length and shall be labelled at each junction and terminal
point for easy identification of circuits.
1.6. Prior to drawing wiring in conduits/trunking, the entire system inclusive of
outlet boxes, MCB distribution boards etc. shall be completed and inspected.
Any conduits/trunking not accepted by the Engineer shall be replaced without
additional charges.
1.7. Colour code and identification of cable/wiring cores shall be in compliance
with Federal Electricity and Water Authority’s Regulations.
1.8. Particulars of each luminaire, together with respective number, type and rating
of lamps, shall be as described and specified in Schedule of Luminaires.
Samples of each type of lighting fixture and other related equipment together
with photometric data for each luminaire shall be submitted for Engineer’s
final approval prior to placing orders for the same.
2. LIGHTING LUMINAIRES AND CONTROL ACCESSORIES.
All luminaires shall be designed, manufactured and tested to comply with the relevant
and respective requirements of BS EN 60598-1:1993.
All luminaires shall be of high quality as specified in the Schedules. The type, size,
number of lamps, IP rating etc. for each luminaire shall generally be specified in the
Schedule of Luminaires.

Lighting Fixtures and Accessories
2.1. TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES.
2.1.1. Conventional tubular fluorescent luminaires complying with the

requirements of BS EN 60598 shall be equipped with spring-loaded bi-
pin lamp holders and instant-start control-gear to give trouble free
operation at an ambient temperature of 45 deg.C. The control gear shall
be of polyester resin filled type, noiseless in operation and shall be
contained within the body of the luminaire. All internal wiring shall be
silicon rubber flexible type of adequate cross-sectional area neatly
clipped in position.
2.1.2 The body of the luminaires shall be constructed of high quality
corrosion-resistant sheet steel treated with a zinc based primer and then
stove-enamelled.
2.1.3. All tubular fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS
EN 60081:1998, BS 1853: PART 1:1990, IEC81:1984. Unless specified
otherwise, all lamps shall have daylight colour appearance and
minimum color rendering index of 65.
2.1.4. Wherever specified, triphosphorus lamps shall be used to achieve high
colouring rendering index of minimum 80.
2.1.5. All conventional ballasts shall conform to the requirements of BS EN
60920 :1991 and BS EN 60921:1991, and all electronic ballasts shall
conform to the requirements of BS EN 60928:1995, BS EN
60929:2004. All ballasts shall be suitable for instant start operation.
2.1.6. All starters for fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of
BS EN 60155:1995, BS 3772:1990, IEC 155, 155a.
2.1.7. All lamp-holders shall comply with the requirements of BS 60400:
2000.
2.1.7. All luminaires shall be equipped with capacitors complying with the
requirements of BS EN 61048:1993, BS EN 61049:1993BS
4017:1979, IEC 566:1972, to give a power factor in access of 0.9
lagging.
2.1.8 Radio interference suppression capacitors shall be provided in each
luminaire.
2.2. ENERGY SAVING COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
2.2.1. Compact fluorescent lamp fixtures shall comply with the requirements
of BS EN 60598 shall be used wherever specified in compliance with
descriptions detailed in Schedule of Luminaires.
2.2.2. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be complete with integral control gear
and other components deemed essential for a high quality lamp.
2.2.3. Wherever specified, triphosphorus lamps shall be used to achieve high
colouring rendering index.
2.3. LOW VOLTAGE HALOGEN LAMP LUMINAIRES.
2.3.1. All low voltage halogen lamp luminaires shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4533: PART 102: section 102.6:1990, BS EN 60598-
2 –23: 1997.

These shall generally be used as recessed downlighters and shall be
complete with separate or integral transformers and 50 W halogen
lamps.
2.3.2. The body of the fixture shall be made of high quality diecast aluminium
with steel hook springs and shall be complete with a 50 mm diameter
dichroic reflector. A terminal block mounting rod and the lamp’s steel
hook fixing system shall facilitate easy installation.
2.3.3. Tungsten halogen lamps shall generally comply with the requirements of
BS 1075 : 1989, IEC 357 : 1977.
2.4. EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES.
2.4.1. Emergency lighting fixtures shall be installed in approximate locations

indicated in the drawings. These shall be of the self-contained non-
maintained type complete with integral rechargeable battery, battery-
charger, automatic mains failure change-over switch etc., rated for three
hours operating period.
2.4.2. Emergency lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS EN
60598-2-22:1999, BS 5266, BS 4533: PART 102: SECTION 102.22 :
1990.
2.4.3. Automatic change-cover switches/contactors shall comply with the
2.5. FLOOD LIGHT FIXTURES
2.5.1 Floodlight fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 60598-

2-5:1998 and shall be designed for narrow beam or wide beam application
suitable for metal halide, high pressure sodium vapour or high pressure
mercury vapour lamps, as specified in the Schedule of Luminaires.
2.5.2 The main frame and casing of the fixtures shall be constructed of die-cast
aluminium.
2.5.3 Fixtures shall be complete with components and accessories deemed
essential for high quality high performance floodlight fixtures and shall be
inclusive of, but not limited to, mounting brackets, thermal fatigue
resistant safety glasses, high class mirror reflectors, integral ignitors,
control gear etc.
2.5.4. Unless stated otherwise in Schedule of Luminaires, all fixtures shall be
fitted with silicon gaskets to give minimum degree of protection IP65.
2.5.5. Mounting bracket shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized steel and
shall be equipped with tilt scale with a range of 150 degrees.
2.6. POLE MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURES
The contractor will supply, install, and make the testing and commissioning of
solar energy pole lights 30 No. in all parking areas to be fully controlled by
solar energy, as per the following specifications:
2.6.1. Pole Light height 6m, Pole shape to be Conical, Step or Decorative type
as per DM Architect Approval.
2.6.2. Hot Dip Galvanized or Die-cast Aluminum poles with high corrosion
resistance and powder coating painting layer (Hot Dip Galvanized with

not less than 100 Micron and Powder Coating with not less than 80
Micron), RAL color as per DM Architect Approval.
2.6.3. Stainless Steel Allen Key Countersunk Socket Screws should be
provided.
2.6.4. Integral control gear and Durable silicon rubber gasket for batteries
housing IP-65.
2.6.5. Batteries should be installed according to the following methods:
Installation to be made within the pole construction, internal insulation

should be provided to batteries enclosure to reduce the effect of the
transferred heat on batteries.
Separate WI P PVC Enclosure and complete arrangement should be kept

inside a manhole adjacent to pole foundation. Provided manhole cover
should be marked with electrical.
2.6.6. It is recommended to provide batteries with minimum capacity of 150Ah.
Batteries calculations should be provided against system requirements
(Batteries calculation subject to Engineer Approval).
2.6.7. Provided batteries should be suitable for illumination period (8-10) hrs
from sunrise daily according to project requirements. It should have
backup capacity (Sun Autonomy) of two days.
2.6.8. 8-Free of maintenance sealed batteries (Gel Type, AGM Type, Lead Acid
Type, Lithium ... , etc) with operating ambient temperature (O°C -55°C)
and subject to Engineer Approval. (Working Temperature -20°C -70°C)
2.6.9. Photovoltaic system consists of high efficiency potovaltaic cells
(Monocrystalline, Polycrystalline, etc) with 150W power or as per system
requirements.
2.6.10 Photovoltaic panels shall be capable of receiving indirect light (during
winter cloudy time) with recommended size (1500mm X 700mm). Solar
panel shall be covered with tempered glass for protection.
2.6.11. Solar charger controller with DC load 12V 10A and inverter 150W. The
controller shall be controlled through microprocessor control with high
efficiency. The controller shall be controlled through microprocessor
control with high efficiency. IP-65 W/P with overcharge and discharge
protection.
2.6.12 Photo sensor, timer, automatic on-off switch, consumption control,
automatic season adjustment, low battery level indicator and high battery
level indicator should be provided to assure accurate operational
conditions.
2.6.13. Proposed Solar lighting System should be designed properly (standalone
solar system) as per the application which should be suitable to work
through the conventional power in case of the failure of the solar power
(Automatic switch to be provided for changing the operation modes).
2.6.14. Light Fixture should be LED Technology, with 4500 Lumen (White Color
Temp. Output), IP-65, Diffuser UV Stabilized and the Reflector with Pure
Mirror Aluminum. Proposed fixtures subject to Engineer Approval.
3. ACCESSORIES FOR LUMINAIRES
3.1. Lighting fixtures such as mirror light fixtures equipped with integral safety shaver
socket outlets shall incorporate safety isolating transformers used as integral parts

of lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS 3535: PART 1:
1990 and BS EN 60742: 1996.
3.2. Electrical track systems for luminaires shall comply with the requirements
of BS EN 60570: 1994.
3.3. All luminaire supporting couplers for domestic, light industrial and
commercial use shall comply with the requirements of BS 6972: 1988.

SECTION - 16511
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission fully programmable
microprocessor based architectural and intelligent Lighting Control System for control of
lighting circuits in the Main Entrance, Lobbies, Foyers, Periodicals, Hotel Reception
Multipurpose Hall and other public areas. The system shall be complete with, but not limited
to, all necessary Lighting Distribution Panel Boards, Modular Switching Assemblies,
Centralized Preset Lighting Controls, Software, PC, cabling, containment system etc. and
any other components and accessories deemed essential for high quality high performance
state-of-the art Lighting Control System, all in strict compliance with these Specifications
and relevant details in drawings. Some spaces, as shown in the drawings are controlled by
using occupancy sensor, stair cases are controlled by motion sensors.
1. GENERAL.
1.1. Detailed load schedules for dedicated lighting distribution boards for each
specific area shall be provided by the sub-contractor in compliance with
design lighting layout. The load schedule shall be complete with particulars of
each outgoing circuit with respect to type and number of lighting luminaries
and control zones.
1.2. Three No. dedicated Intelligent Lighting Control Panels, designated ILCP1,
ILCP2 and ILCP3 have been specified for control of lighting circuits in
specific areas as indicated in the drawings
1.3. The switching schedule shall be designed to offer switching ON/OFF of
lighting points in a pattern to be advised by the Engineer/Client at site. If
necessary, circuits and number of lighting points in respective circuits may be
altered to suit switching requirements.
1.4. All installation works shall be carried out by experienced personnel in strict
compliance with the instructions and guidelines provided by the manufacturer.
1.5. The Contractor shall be required to provide full two year warranty and limited
five year warranty on all equipment supplied and installed in the system.
1.6. Prior to placing the order for the Lighting Control System, the Contractor shall
submit revised circuits, load schedules complete with full technical details of
the system and components offered, for Engineers study, comments and
approval.
1.7. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely tested and
commissioned by manufacturer’s Engineer. All lighting load and control
circuits shall be tested live to check for continuity and freedom from defects.
1.8. Prior to handing over the installation, the Contractor shall be required to make
arrangements with the Manufacturer to train Client’s designated personnel in
the understanding of the system capabilities, its correct operation and
maintenance schedules and requirements.

Lighting Control Systems
2. OCCUPANCY SENSORS
How does an occupancy sensor work?

The general answer is that occupancy sensors work by detecting human presence or
activity. The specific answer is that occupancy sensors use one or more of three
different technologies to detect or "sense" human presence and/or activity.
The most common technology is passive infrared (PIR). A PIR sensor works by
sending out invisible infrared beams that read or respond to temperature differences.
If there is no one in the range of the sensor the sensor does not respond. When a
warmer object, such as a human body, crosses two or more beams the sensor responds
to the difference in temperature between the person and the background. This is the
technology used in basic security sensors. In the case of a basic security sensor, there
will be typically 4 - 10 beams which mean each beam is fairly wide. This is why you
can sometimes walk directly towards a security sensor and nothing happens. It is
because you are moving within one beam and not crossing two beams. Only when
you cross at least two beams will the sensor activate.
In modern PIR occupancy sensors there can be over 1400 individual beams which
make them much more responsive to small movements such as sitting at a desk and
typing on a keyboard. PIR works very well in most commercial environments and can
detect at a long range, up to 40 meters, in warehouses and underground car parks. PIR
has several limitations, however; it requires line of sight and will not read through any
material including glass. In addition, PIR does not work well in extremely warm
environments as it cannot distinguish between the temperature of the human body and
the background.
The second common technology is microphonics. As the name implies, occupancy

sensors that incorporate microphonics work by picking up noise that is typical of
human occupancy or activity. Advanced microphonics sensors incorporate Automatic
Gain Control (AGC) and can "learn" background noises such as the steady hum of a
central air conditioner or the sound of a circulating fan. They are also sensitive
enough to pick up sounds typical of human activity such as typing on a keyboard,
talking on the phone, a phone ringing, tapping on a desk, a chair squeaking, walking
on a wood floor and numerous other sounds that are typically generated by human
presence or activity. Microphonics type sensors do not require line of sight and can
hear around corners. This type of sensor works very well in large open plan office and
commercial areas as they can cover a large area without having to "see" all of it. The
limitation of microphonics sensors is that they do not work in very noisy
envorinments such as a factory or where a recurring noise not necessarily related to
human activity such as a TV that stays on in the background or an individual, window
type air conditioner that comes on and off whether there is a person in the room or
not.
The third common tecnnology is high frequency (HF) ultrasound or ultrasonics
sensors. HF works exactly the same as a bat's "radar" or a submarine's "sonar." The
sensor sends out a high frequency sound wave that bounces around the space and
returns to the sensor. Any movement that disturbs the wave activates the sensor. HF
sensors can be very sensitive and can read through many materials including the
most commonly used interior construction materials and glass. From a human
occupancy standpoint, HF's big limitation is that it responds to any motion, not just

human presence. For example, an open window and rustling curtains or a moving
window shade or, in an office environment a piece of paper coming out of a printer,
can activate an HF sensor even if no one is there.
To enhance the strengths and minimize the limitations of each of the three
technologies, sensor manufacturers sometimes combine technologies in "dual
technology" sensors that typically include a combination of PIR and either
microphonics or HF.
The most important issue for a successful occupancy sensor installation is to
understand the strengths and limitations of each type of sensor and to choose the
appropriate sensor for the application. Occupancy sensors can save significant
amounts of energy and take the human factor out of remembering to turn off the
lights, the air conditioner and any other equipment that only needs to be on when
there is human presence.
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
1. LUTRON, USA.
2. CLIPSAL, Australia.
3. ABB, EU.

SPECIFICATIONS ELEC/SPEC.16721/16770.
SECTION –16721 / 16770
ANOLOGUE ADDRESSABLE VOICE INTEGRATED
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission a high-quality fast-
acting Voice integrated electronic Analogue Addressable Fire Detection and Alarm
system comprising, but not limited to, Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP),
Repeat Fire Alarm Control Panels (RFACP), combined Optical Smoke and Heat
Sensors, Heat Sensors, combined Optical Smoke/Heat Sensors and sounder units,
Manual Break Glass Call points, Electronic Sounders, Interface Units, Loud Speakers,
Loop powered Distributed Amplifier Units (DAU), Audio Control Units (ACU), all
loop cabling and necessary components and accessories deemed necessary for a safe,
reliable and satisfactory system, conforming to the relevant and applicable
requirements and recommendations of BS 5839-1:2002,BS EN 5839-8:1998, BS
5445, BS 5446, and in strict compliance with the latest rules, regulations and
recommendations of the Local Civil Defense Authority (UAE Fire Code).
2. GENERAL CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
2.1. The various components of the proposed fire detection and alarm system
indicated in the respective drawings are notional and their number and
locations may be altered on site to comply with the requirements and
recommendations of the Local Civil Defense Authority. Prior to submitting his
proposal and offer, the Contractor shall be required to coordinate with the
aforementioned authority and also with the selected/approved manufacturer of
the proposed equipment to ensure all necessary components, accessories,
cabling etc., are included in the offer as no claims for variations shall be
allowed for lack of knowledge in this respect.
2.2. Prior to placing order for any equipment, the Contractor shall submit
comprehensive documents comprising working drawings, catalogues and
descriptive literature of components, maintenance manual etc., for Engineer’s
study and approval.
2.3. All installation works shall conform to the best principles of modern practice
and shall be carried out by fully competent tradesmen of appropriate grades.
2.4. All equipment and material shall be brand new and manufactured by reputable
companies.
2.5. All system components shall be manufactured by one manufacturer who shall
be on the local Civil Defense Authority’s list of approved manufacturers.
2.6. The Contractor shall be required to train and instruct client’s personnel in the
correct use, operation and supervision of the system, preferably prior to the
official completion and handing over of the project.
File: ELECSPEC16721/16770.doc Page 1 of 8

Analogue Addressable Voice Integrated
Fire Detection and Alarm System
2.7. The Main Fire Alarm panel MFACP shall be located in the ground floor Foyer
and the Repeat Control panel RFACP shall be located in the ground floor
Security Room.
3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. In the event of a fire condition, the ongoing voice system, comprising back
ground music system and P.A. system, shall be terminated promptly and pre-
recorded voice alert and evacuation messages, in Arabic and in English
languages, stored in the Distributed Amplifier Units as well as in the Audio
Control Units shall be transmitted via loudspeakers to selected zones in a
programmed sequence. The Manufacturer of the proposed System shall
submit, through the Contractor, full particulars of safety steps in the operation
of the system to ensure very orderly evacuation procedure without developing
any panic situation.
3.2. The fire detection and alarm system shall be designed to facilitate accurate
identification of the source of heat/smoke/fire in their early stages to minimize
occurrences of false alarm due to faulty equipment, electrical transients, system
faults, presence of insects etc.
3.3. All system components and devices shall be connected to a two-wire loop circuit/s
with each device having its own built-in isolator. Removal or disconnection of
any device or component from the loop shall not affect the functioning and
performance of other components and devices connected in the system.
3.4. All station devices inclusive of MFACP, RFACP, smoke and heat sensors,
sounders, manual call points, Interface Units, Distributed Amplifier Units etc.,
shall be installed on the same loop.
3.5. Each device shall be assigned up to 32 character alphanumeric label. In case of
fire, fault or warning, the label of device sensing threshold shall appear on
visual display unit of the panel. Any modification in the label shall only be
carried out from the built-in keyboard of the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
3.6. The system shall be designed to provide all the benefits of a Soft Addressable
System and overcome any disadvantages of a Hard Addressable System.
3.7. The system shall be designed for operation on 24-50 V DC supply.
3.8. In the event a fire condition is reported either from a sensor or from a manual
call point, an alarm shall be sounded at the Main Fire Alarm panel. If the
alarm is not acknowledged within three minutes, all loud speakers shall be
activated throughout the building for occupants to vacate the building.
3.9. Provisions and facilities shall be made at the Fire Alarm Control panel for
carrying out the following functions:
3.9.1. Prior to sounding an alarm, to distinguish between a fire and fault

condition by comparing the plotted patterns from a sensor against
known fire and fault patterns held in its memory.
3.9.2. To record the time, date and place of occurrence of every fire and fault
condition in its memory. To silence the alarm loud speakers but the
visual indication to remain until the system is reset.
3.9.3. To operate any particular loud speaker or a group of loud speakers in
evacuate or alert mode.
3.9.4. To change the sensitivity of any sensor in the system automatically.

3.9.5. In the event of fire, fault or warning situation, the label of the
concerned sensing device shall appear on its visual display panel.
3.9.6. To assign, change or modify label of any device without the use of any
external hardware element.
3.9.7. To enable/disable any device during maintenance periods.
3.9.8. To programme or change sequence of loud speakers.
3.9.9. To constantly monitor and check the following circuits and fault
conditions :
i) Power supply to the loops.
ii) Open circuit, short circuit, earth and any other fault
condition in the loops.
iii) Fault in keyboard and printer circuits.
iv) Communication failure.
iv) Errors in cards and loops.
3.9.7. In the event of a Fire Alarm situation, the proposed System shall be
designed to initiate the following :
i) Transmit signal of fire condition to lift controls.
ii) Release doors normally locked by magnetic devices.
iii) Shutdown mechanical ventilation equipment.
iv) Start up smoke extract fans.
v) Initiate Alert Signals to all panels.
4. SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND DEVICES
All components and devices described below shall be designed to be suitable for use in a
Voice Integrated Analogue Addressable Fire Detection and Alarm System.
4.1. INTEGRATED MAIN FIRE VOICE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

(MFACP)
The Main Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be constructed of robust material and
shall be aesthetically designed with a lockable front cover.
The main features and functions of the control panel have been described in
section 3 above. The Contractor shall include any other functions deemed
necessary for the satisfactory operation of the system.
The control panel shall be computer controlled using analogue technique to
detect smoke/heat/fire conditions. The panel shall have the following features,
and shall comply with the requirements of BS 5839: Part 4: 1988, EN 54: Part
4.
i) Shall be an Integrated Fire Detection, Voice Alarm and Public Address
System.
ii) Shall support Distributed Amplifier Units.
iii) Shall support 3 fire detection loop circuits.
iv) Shall cover minimum 16 No. fire detection zones.
v) Shall provide Fire and Voice Alarm fault and disablement events
display.
vi) Shall have minimum 5 voice evacuation zones per loop.
vii) Shall provide messages from standard Audio pack.
viii) Shall have built-in Emergency microphone.

In addition, the Panel shall be complete with, but not limited to, the following
elements :
a. Built-in full qwerty keyboard.

b. Visual display unit capable of displaying 4 lines of 40 characters each.
c. Built-in 40 characters printer.
d. Internal lead acid battery complete with charger and 24 hours backup
supply in the event of mains supply failure.
e. Indication lamps for fire, power, warning and for all fault conditions.
f. Push button switch for cancelling fault buzzer.
g. Controls for silencing sounders and resetting the system.
h. In addition to the functions described in Item 3 above, the menu function
keys on the keyboard shall provide the following features :
1. Indicating previous fire events.

2. Indicate previous system events.
3. Loop map connections.
4. Check cleanliness of sensors.
4.2. REPEAT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (RFACP)
Repeat Fire Control Panel shall be located in areas indicated in item 2.7 above.
The Panel shall repeat and display all messages and common indications
provided in the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall have all essential
alarm controls, menu facilities and optional printer. The panels shall be
complete with in-built batteries and battery chargers.
4.3. INTERFACE UNITS
Interface Units shall be provided to interface fire/fault signals emanating from

Voice Integrated Fire Alarm Panels, with magnetic doors, AC equipment, Lift,
Building Management System, Pressurization Fans etc. All inputs, outputs and
power supply units shall be monitored for any faults.
4.4. OPTICAL SMOKE SENSORS
These shall be of optical type in a single head designed to detect visible smoke
from slow smouldering fires, and shall comply with the requirements of BS
5839: Part 5:1988, BS 5445 : Part 7 : 1984, EN 54 : Part 7.
To facilitate ease in maintenance and replacement of sensing element, the
device shall be composed of three chambers. The outermost chamber housing
the optical sensing element shall be plugged to the central chamber housing
the electronic micro-processor circuitry. The latter shall be plugged on to the
inner chamber housing wiring and terminals.

4.5. HEAT SENSORS
These shall comply with the requirements of BS 5445: Parts 5 & 8, EN 54 :

Parts 5 and 8, and shall comprise three chambers as described for smoke
sensors in item 4.4 above
4.6. OPTICAL/ELECTRONIC HEAT SENSOR
These devices combine the optical smoke sensor and heat sensor in one head
and offer exceptional detection spectrum. The optical element monitors large
particle visible smoke from slow smouldering fires, and the electronic heat
element monitors high energy fires with little or no smoke. These shall comply
with the requirements of BS 5445: Parts 5 & 7.
4.7. MANUAL CALL POINTS
These shall comply with the requirements of BS 5839: Part 2: 1983, EN 54 :

Part 2, and shall be of the colour specified by the local Civil Defence
Authority.
4.8. SOUNDERS
These shall comply with the requirements of BS 5839: Part 3: 1983, EN 54 :

Part 3, and shall have an output of 100 dB at a distance of 1 meter.
4.9. LOUDSPEAKERS
Aesthetically designed surface mounted and/or recessed loudspeakers of

suitable wattage shall be installed in approximate locations indicated in the
drawings. The speakers shall offer a high sound pressure level and a wide
frequency range and shall be suitable for both speech and music reproduction.
The number of loud speakers may be altered to suit site acoustic conditions.
The voice system, as an alternative to conventional sounders, shall be
designed and installed complete with all necessary equipment, accessories,
wiring, conduits etc. and shall be fully integrated/interfaced with the fire
detection and alarm system.
Each loudspeaker assembly shall consist of a single piece 6W RMS dual core
loudspeaker and a frame with a 100V matching transformer mounted on the
back. The transformer shall be a multiple-tapping type to facilitate control of
sound volume and shall be complete with fire dome and thermal fusible link.
In addition, supporting brackets shall be provided for fixing to ceilings.
The loudspeakers shall have the following technical specifications:
i) on-axis frequency response not to vary more than +/- 10 dB over the
frequency range 70 Hz to 18 kHz.
ii) Minimum sensitivity: 90 dB/W.
iii) Minimum input power: 6W.
4.10. LOOP POWERED DISTRIBUTED AMPLIFIER UNITS
Suitable number and adequately rated Amplifiers shall be provided to match

the final number and ratings of the loud speakers installed for the system. The
Amplifiers shall be fed from a suitably rated Uninterrupted Power Supply
Unit. They shall amplify audio signals for broadcast to loudspeakers in various
zones. The audio signals are either live speech from microphones or
prerecorded messages from digital stores.
The output voltage of amplifiers may be selected between 100V, 70V or 50V.
All amplifiers shall be provided with a 2 x 16 character display for fault
monitoring and status display.
All amplifier units shall comply with the relevant requirements of BS 5839-
8:1998 and BS 5839-9: 2003 and shall be assigned a distinctive label in Fire
Alarm Control Panel to identify its location.
4.11. AUDIO CONTROL UNITS (ACU)
Audio Control Units shall be installed adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel and shall be powered by suitably rated Uninterrupted Power Supply
Unit.
ACUs shall be connected to both fire alarm loops and voice system audio
loops. The audio loops shall carry live messages from a microphone or
prerecorded stored messages from master ACU to the DAUs in the system for
broadcast to selected areas and zones.
The ACUs shall be designed to store up to four messages, each of 45 seconds

duration.
4.12. BACKGROUIND MUSIC AND P.A. SYSTEM
The background music system shall comprise of 1 No. CD player, 1 No. triple
cassette deck, 1 No. AM/FM tuner, 1 No. goose neck type table mounted
microphone and all necessary accessories and components deemed essential
for a high-quality high-performance music and P.A. system. Particulars of the
main components of the system shall be as follows :
4.12.1. CD PLAYER
The CD player shall be designed to load up to six discs in the magazine

to be played sequentially or randomly by use of a remote signal, and
shall be designed to conform to the following technical specifications :
AC supply 220V, 50 Hz.

Frequency response 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz.
Signal to noise ratio 90 dB.
Distortion 0.008% THD at 1 kHz.
Channel separation 82 dB.
Quantization 16 bit twin DAC.
4.12.2. TRIPLE SEQUENCER CASSETTE DECK
The cassette deck shall be designed to house up to three standard C60

and C90 M-track music cassettes. The design shall provide operational
features to include auto-music search, audio sensing, auto reverse, auto
eject, power off/on etc. Technical specifications of the unit shall be as
follows :

Output level 0 dBm (775 mV) 600 ohms
Mono output.
Frequency range 50 Hz to 12500 Hz +/- 3 dB.
Distortion less than 3% THD at 1 kHz.
Tape speed 4.75 cm/s
Fast forward/rewind less than 140s to rewind C60
Cassette.
4.12.3. FM/AM TUNER
Technical specifications of the tuner shall be as follows :

Sensitivity 3uV for FM channels
20 uV for AM channels
IF rejection 70 dB
Nominal output 100 mV
Antenna impedance 75 ohms.
Tuning meth Electronic. Onsite adjustable
with LED on station indicator.
4.12.4. EQUIPMENT RACK
The equipment rack shall be of aesthetic design and full particulars

related to material, dimensions, finish etc. shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval prior to manufacture.
5. FIRE ALARM AUTO-DIALLER
Fire alarm auto-dialler and a telephone line jack outlet shall be inter-faced with the
Main Fire Alarm panel for transmitting fire alarm status to the Local Civil Defence
Authority for monitoring purposes.
6. WIRING
All wiring and cabling shall be carried out using fire resistant 2 core 1.5 sq. mm.
cables complying with the requirements of BS 7629-2:1997, BS 6387:1994, BS 6207-
3:2001
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS.
1. GENT, U.K.
2. BOSCH, GERMANY.
3. SIEMENS, GERMANY.
OR OTHER APPROVED EQUIVALENT.
END OF SECTIONS 16721 and 16770

SECTION 16780
CENTRALLY MONITORED SELF CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM
1. General
The Emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed & installed to meet the local civil
defense requirements & the respective EN & BS standards and regulations applicable on the project. The
product should be from ISO certified Manufacturer and the vendor shall have at least 5 years proven ex‐
perience in successful installation commissioning of emergency lighting systems in UAE
Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions,
Illuminate the escape routes.
Indicate the escape route direction clearly
Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving equipment on the premises are
illuminated.
Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all hazardous process
Monitoring units shall be used for automatic testing & monitoring of Escape route, EXIT & Safety and shall
be distributed on the building based on Security Zone or Typical Areas etc., to minimize wiring. The prod‐
uct shall have local civil defense authority approvals.
Input Voltage: 220V AC
Light fitting Battery Type: 3.6V, 4AH Ni Cd
Light output in Emergency operation: 30% Minimum
Battery back up required for Duration of Three Hours under emergency operation.
2. Code of Practice for Emergency Lighting
Ministry of Interior‐Department of Civil Defense
2.1. Code of Practice for Emergency Lighting
This is prepared in conjunction with standards BS5266‐1:1999, and EN1838 for best practice of design and
installation for Emergency Lighting in most type of premises, other than domestic premises consisting of
individual houses. This section is also not applicable on Airports & Defense Installations.
2.2. Definitions in Emergency Lighting:
Emergency Lighting: Lighting provided for use when the supply to the normal lighting fails.
Emergency EXIT: An EXIT light which is intended to be used during an emergency.
Escape Lighting: That part of the emergency lighting which is provided to ensure that the escape
route is illuminated at all material times.
Escape Route: A route forming part of the means of escape from a point of building to a final
EXIT.

Centrally Monitored Self Contained
Emergency Lighting System
Central Battery Emergency Lighting System : A complete emergency lighting installation from the standby
battery power source to the emergency lighting lamps.
E.g. A circuit from Central battery connected through wiring to several escape
luminaries.
Self Contained Emergency lighting: A luminaire providing maintained or non maintained emergency light‐
ing in which all the elements, such as the battery, the lamp, the control unit are
provided within the unit.
Maintained emergency lighting : A lighting system in which all emergency lighting lamps are in operation
at all material times.
Non – maintained Emergency lighting : A lighting system in which all emergency lighting lamps are in op‐
eration only in the event of power failure.
Combined (sustained) emergency luminaries: An emergency light containing at least two lamps, one of
which is energized from normal lighting supply and the other from an emergency
lighting supply. Such a luminaire is intended to sustain illumination at all material
times.
2.3. Need for Emergency Lighting:

When the supply to the emergency lighting fails, emergency lighting is required for the following func‐
tions,
Illuminate the escape routes.
Indicate the escape route direction clearly
Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving equipment on the premises are
illuminated.
Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all hazardous process
2.4. Defined Escape routes and response times:
For routes that are permanently unobstructed and up to 2m wide the horizontal luminance at floor level
on the center line of escape route should not be less than 1 lux. The emergency lighting detailed in this
clause should be provided within 5 sec of the failure of the normal lighting supply.
2.5. Uniformity of luminance:
Care should be taken to avoid abrupt changes between dark and light areas on the floor to the escape
routes. It is therefore necessary to illuminate the route reasonably uniformly.
2.6. Mounting Heights of Luminaries:
The mounting height of the individual lights will be governed by the physical characteristics of the area
under consideration and the best compromise should be chosen. The possibility of smoke accumulation
rendering the emergency lighting ineffective should be considered with regards to mounting heights.
2.7. Duration:

The period of time that the luminaire can continuously provide the minimum luminance required in the
emergency condition. The time specified for standard premises is 3 Hours, with exceptions under special
permission where other parallel backup supply is provided.
2.8. Records:
On completion of work, approved drawings of the emergency lighting installation should be provided and
retained on the premises. In addition a log book should be provided for recording the routine examina‐
tions, tests, defects and alterations. A manual for operation and maintenance should be handed to the
occupier.
2.9. Emergency & EXIT lighting design.
2.9.1 Common requirements on Emergency Lights
1 Emergency lighting should be uniformly provided along the escape route to ensure a minimum lev‐
el of 1lux illumination on the floor level. Non maintained or sustained type of lighting can be used
for this purpose.
2 All service rooms, plant rooms and areas where hazardous activity is carried out the minimum illu‐
mination must be at least 5 Lux.
3 Emergency lights should be provided in basement floors with access to public to have a minimum
illumination of 2 Lux, to avoid panic.
4 All Fire Fighting and Alarm devices like Call points, Extinguishers, Hosereel
Cabinets, First aid boxes and spare / tool boxes must be well illuminated by emergency lighting.
5 One Emergency light should be provided in each of the landing of the Escape stair.
6 At least one Emergency light fitting should be provided in public toilets / janitors / ablutions, and
more units should be provided depending on the area.
7 An emergency light should be provided outside the point of EXIT of the building.
8 A time delay on mains operation should be set for 1 min’ before the emergency light is switched off
on power supply restoration.
9 Extra care should be taken to provide uniform illumination in places where Handicapped / Women
/ Children / Seniors can be subjected to panic conditions.
2.9.2 Common requirements on EXIT lights
1 Maintained EXIT lights with specified viewing distances and with legends conforming to BS & EN
standards must be used to indicate the escape routes.
2 Maintained EXIT lights with specified viewing distances and with English & Arabic script and direc‐
tional arrows can be used to indicate the escape routes.
3 A maintained EXIT light with direction pointing to the escape route should be visible from any point
of the Escape corridor.
4 A maintained EXIT light should be fixed above all EXIT doors.
5 A maintained EXIT light should be provided inside the stair where it leads to the point of EXIT of
the premises.
6 Directional maintained EXIT lights leading to Escape route / stair should be provided in basements
and driveways.

2.10. Special Applications:
Apart from the standard requirements listed above, the following should be provided in such premises,
2.10.1 Hotels / Short Term Leased Apartments
1 Each guest room should be provided with an emergency light.
2 All Conference facilities / Entertainment rooms / Restaurants / Ball rooms mustbe provided with
average illumination of 1 lux covering the complete floor area.
EXIT lights should be provided on all doors leading to escape route in all such areas.
2.10.2 Office Complex:
1 Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on the escape route for all
open offices.
2 Atleast one emergency light should be provided inside each office if it is accessible to the public at
any stage, and more units are required depending on the area.
3 All conference rooms should be provided with average illumination of 1 lux covering the complete
floor area. EXIT light should be provided above doors in such rooms.
2.10.5 Residential Complex:
1 Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on the escape route for all
public areas.
2 All public toilets / health clubs / pool areas / children’s play area must be provided with emergency
lights.
2.10.6 Covered Car park including Basements:
1 Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on the driveways and
walkways.
2 Escape routes leading to stairs must be illuminated uniformly.
3 Directional EXIT lights should be provided leading to EXIT doors or Escape routes and not along the
driveway leading to vehicular EXIT.
2.10.9 Industry/Plants
1 Emergency lights should be provided to give 1 lux uniform illumination on theescape route for all
public areas.
2 All areas where machinery is involved and hazardous activity is carried out, the minimum illumina‐
tion must be at least 5 Lux.
2.11. Testing and Monitoring the Emergency Lighting System:
As per the clause 8 and section 12.4 of BS5266, the complete emergency lighting installation including
individual light fixtures should be tested and records should be maintained.
2.11.1 Daily Tests:
1 Any fault recorded in the log book has been given urgent attention and action noted.
2 Every lamp in a maintained system is lit.

3 The main control in Central system indicates healthy operation of system or indicating LED on the
self contained light is lit.
2.11.2 Monthly Tests:
1 Each luminaire is tested by stimulating a mains failure and switching the system or the light into
battery operation.
2 All light fittings should be visually inspected, unless the system is addressable in nature.
3 Each Central battery system / self contained light fitting should be tested on stimulated mains fail‐
ure for one quarter to its rated duration.
4 All charger / Control devices / battery should be visually inspected in Central battery system.
5 All faulty lamps / charger / control devices / battery etc should be replaced and the system put into
complete normal operation.
6 Records should be maintained.
2.11.3 Yearly Tests:

1 In addition to the above tests, all central battery systems and self contained lights must be tested
on stimulated mains failure for the rated duration of the battery.
2 Rated life of the battery must be verified and all battery units must be replaced with new units if
required.
3 A measurement of emergency illumination is carried out randomly on the premises.
4 Records should be maintained.
2.12. Central Battery Emergency Lighting System
Both in section 11 and clause 12.4 of BS5266, as testing and monitoring of Emergency Lighting system is
mandatory, and because of the short expected life of battery in self contained light fixtures an Electroni‐
cally monitored Central battery based Emergency Lighting system is preferred on installations where
higher no. of light fittings or large area is involved. The following are the premises where such an installa‐
tion is preferred,
a) Multistoried Residential & Office Buildings.
b) Shopping Centers or covered / enclosed malls.
c) Hotels & Short term leased apartments.
d) Entertainment Centers.
e) Industrial Complexes.
f) Hospitals.
2.13. Requirements on Central Battery System
1 Electronic Control module should be provided on all control panels with possibility of testing and
monitor ing of the system and the connected light fittings.
2 Each unit should be provided with a logbook facility to log at least 100 events occurred.

3 Battery should be designed for stationary use and automotive battery is not acceptable. Provision
should be provided to maintain an ambient temperature of max. 30 degrees C for the battery. Min‐
imum expected life of such battery at such temperatures should be at least 10 years.
4 Charger provided must be temperature compensated and should be able to re‐charge the battery
from min to max in 20 hours duration.
5 A maximum of 20 light fittings can be connected on each circuit originating from these units. Ade‐
quate protection devices must be provided for each of these circuits.
6 Inverter / Converter / Switching over modules inside the Central battery unit and the distribution
panel must be provided in such a way that failure of one unit does not affect the operation of the
other. At least two such units must be provided in each equipment.
7 Except in maintained system, adequate relays or monitoring devices should be provided to ensure
that emergency lights are turned on in the event of power failure in specific parts of the premises,
covered by different normal distribution panels and also only during complete power failure.
8 All cabling supplying battery power to distribution panels and light fittings should be Fire proof to
maintain the integrity of the system.
9 Wiring should be carried out in such a way that failure of one light fitting does not hinder the oper‐
ation of other units.
10 The voltage drop in cables connecting a central battery to slave luminaire is not to exceed 4% of
the nominal system voltage.
11 The raceways or conduits used for such cabling should not be used for other systems. All cables
within such containment must be of the same operating nominal voltage.

3.0 Monitoring Unit:
The panel should comply with BS5266 and EN50172 standards which are accepted international stan‐
dards for emergency lighting.
Programmable Control panel for max. 250 Nos. self contained fittings with data lines. It should also have
programmable input, stabilized 24Volts voltage independent of battery voltage during mains failure and
with 2 line X40 character LCD displays.
The monitoring panel should have the following features,
Display PCB ‐ Should be with LCD, Key pad, Micro. E‐prom and battery backed memory for storing location
text.
Power supply PCB ‐ With 5V & 24V PSU battery charger and loop drive circuitry.
Loop Card ‐ . Should is with Micro & E‐prom for communicate/Control addressable loop interfaces.
The panel should perform the following functions
Monitor & control all test cycles & functions.
Automatic luminaire search function.
Select timing for automatic function and duration test.
Manual Function and Duration Test function.
Faults like Check wiring, Check lamp, Charger fault, check battery should be displayed with text location.
BMS compatibility option.
4.0 Addressable interface
The addressable interface must be a compact module fitted inside all emergency/exit lights to be moni‐
tored .Allocation of unique address has to be achieved through a hand held programmer, prior to being
connected to the data cable.
The address must be able to read back or change if required using the programmer.
5.0 Central Monitoring Facility
The central monitoring shall be via a central group monitoring hardware & software, monitoring
& programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of an IBM compatible PC with monitor, Pen‐
tium generation processor, keyboard, mouse and a printer. The unit shall operate with software
to give detailed address & information of all luminaires connected to system. The program shall
be user friendly with clear fault indication screens on the monitor. Max.63 Nos. monitoring units
shall be networked to the Central computer
6.0 Addressable Non Maintained Emergency Light
Non – maintained 8W self contained emergency light complete, integral addressable unit and. LED indica‐
tions Failure & Battery operation. The luminaire will have a 3.6V/4AH battery capable of giving minimum
30% light output for a rated duration of 3 hours.
7.0 Addressable Maintained EXIT Light
Maintained 8W self contained emergency light complete, integral addressable unit and. LED indications
Failure & Battery operation. The luminaire will have a 3.6V/4AH battery capable of giving minimum 30%%

light output for a rated duration of 3 hours and shall have EXIT legend with viewing distance of minimum
20 meters.
Address 1 Address 2
LOCAL MAINS
SUPPLY
24v LOOP
WIRING SCAEL SCAEL
( 250 ADDRESSABLE DEVICES MAX ) INTERFACE INTERFACE
SCAEL SCAEL
INTERFACE INTERFACE
EASICHECK PANEL
MONITORING Address 3 Address 4
PANEL SELF-CONTAINED FITTING

SECTION - 16781
MASTER DIGITAL SATELLITE AND TERRRESTRIAL

ANTENNAE SYSTEM.
The Contractor shall supply, erect, connect, test and commission a Satellite/Terrestrial Master TV
(SMATV) reception system based on latest digital technology and comprising, but not limited to, an
array of Terrestrial Antennae and Satellite Dish Antennae on roof, together with all essential
equipment, components, accessories etc., all in compliance with these Specifications and related
drawings. The SMATV system shall form an integral part of the structured voice, data and video
cabling system and shall provide high quality, high performance digital reception of the following
terrestrial and satellite RF signals from channels transmitted by:
a) ARABSAT, comprising approximately 60 channels.
b) NILESAT, comprising approximately 150 channels.
c) HOTBIRD, approximately 650 channels.
d) PAS 7/10.
The channels to be provided shall be selected by the Client and intimated to the Contractor
prior to placing order and installation of the system.
e) The Terrestrial TV Antennae system shall be designed to receive the channels:

Available on the following satellite:
 Arab Sat
 Asia
 Hot Bird
 Nile Sat
 FM Radio
1. GENERAL.
1.1. The installations for the above antennae systems shall be complete with terrestrial
antennae, satellite dish antennae, Multi-band Amplifier, Distribution Modules,
Distribution Amplifiers, IF to IF Convertors, F-Connectors, Multi-way Splitters,
quadrangular Digital LNBFs, RG6/RG11 co-axial cables, isolated co-axial TV
socket outlets, power supply unit and all necessary components and accessories
deemed essential for a reliable, high-quality high-performance system for digital
reception and distribution of VHF/UHF signals in compliance with BS 6513.
1.2. The system shall be designed to transmit specified channels from the above
Satellite Dishes.
1.3. Adequate number of IF to IF Converters shall be provided at the headend and
each Converter shall be equipped with required number of transponder inputs
from the LNBs.
1.4 The output from the IF to IF Converters shall be combined to give a single
output to be distribute free TV air channels from the above dishes.
1.5. To view pay TV channels the users will be required to purchase digital
decoders.

Master Digital Satellite and Terrestrial Antenna System
1.6. The system shall incorporate suitable convertor units to ensure there are no
cross-channel interferences
1.7. The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the signal strength at
each outlet is satisfactory for all channels and wave bands.
1.8. Prior to placing orders and commencement of any installation works, the
contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for his study and approval, full technical
details of all components of the systems proposed for installation.
1.9. The Contractor shall coordinate with the specialist Contractor/installer of
structured cabling system and provide all necessary information and assistance.
2. TERRESTRIAL ANTENNAE
2.1. Separate antenna shall be provided for each specified channel. For clear
reception, each antenna shall be equipped with appropriate number of
elements for respective channel.
2.2. The antennae shall be mounted on metallic mast with the antennae coaxial
cables passing through its central core. The mast shall be installed and braced
in a manner to ensure it shall withstand the strongest anticipated wind
pressures on roof.
2.3. Channelized aerials shall be used for VHF channels and grouped aerials for
UHF channels.
3. SATELLITE DISH ANTENNAE
3.1. High-quality robustly constructed dish antennae shall be mounted on concrete

bases and installed at locations indicated in the drawings. All dish antennae shall
carry a warrantee of at least five years.
3.2. The dishes shall generally be of solid or perforated aluminium construction with
thermostatic powder coating to provide maximum protection from UV exposure
and from severe climatic conditions.
3.3. For C Band reception, the feed horns and LNBs shall be of robust construction to
withstand local atmospheric conditions. The noise temperature of LNBs shall not
exceed 25 deg. C.
3.4. For Ku Band reception, non-switching Quattro LNBFs with a maximum of 0.9
dB noise figure shall be used.
3.5. The antennae shall have the following minimum Specifications:
C BAND :
Band 3.7 – 4.2 GHz

Diameter 10 feet
Gain Linear or circular
Operating temperature Up to 60 deg. C
Mounting Polar
Wind load capability 145 kmph
F/D ratio Less than 0.3
Ku BAND :
Band 10.7 – 12.75 GHz

Diameter 1.35 meters

Gain Linear or circular
Operating temperature Up to 60 deg. C
Type Offset
Wind load capability 145 kmph
Efficiency 70%
3.6. The signals from each selected satellite channel shall be amplified to obtain an
output signal level of not less than 115 dBuv at the head end, and the system
shall be designed to deliver a signal level not less than 70 dBuv at any TV socket
outlet in the system.
4. RF HEAD-END EQUIPMENT
4.1. Head-end shall be of modular construction and shall be designed to accept

additional channels in the future.
4.2. To Terrestrial processors shall be designed to process signals in frequency range
47 – 862 MHz.
4.3. The FM radio processor shall be designed to process signals in frequency range
88 – 108 MHz.
4.4. The satellite processor and digital receiver modules shall be designed to process
IF signals in frequency range 950 – 2150 MHz.
4.5. Each satellite processor module shall be designed to have audio and sub-carrier
tuning range of 5.5 to 9 Mz or better, and each module shall be capable of
transmitting audio and sub-carriers in mono, stereo or dual tone.
4.6. The modulators of all processing modules shall be PAL B/G and the LF audio
level of modulator module shall be adjustable to allow all channels in the system
to have the same balanced audio level. Tuning in the output frequency range of
the modules shall be PLL-synthesized to achieve maximum stability.
4.7. The modulators shall have a saw filter, dual conversion and a tracking filter for
good CNR at the head-end and to avoid forbidden channels in the spectrum.
CNR shall be better than 54 dB inside the channel and better than 65 dB outside
the channel on each module.
4.8. The output levels of individual head-end modules shall be controlled so that the
signal level can be balanced and an equalized output is guaranteed.
4.9. A robust, corrosion, dust, damp and vermin proof cabinet constructed of high-
quality galvanized sheet steel complete with lock and key shall be installed at a
suitable location to house head-end stations and other components required for
the system
5. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
5.1. The SMATV system receive all satellite and terrestrial channels from the RF
head-end and distribute these to all guest rooms via the structured cabling
system.
5.2. Appropriate Line and distribution amplifiers shall be used to distribute signals to
the TV outlets.
5.3. The signal level on RF at the wall outlet shall be 60 and 80 dBuV with CNR of
more than 43 dB with the following parameters :
i) Difference of level between adjacent channels 3 dB

ii) Difference of level between 60 MHz band 8 dB
iii) Difference of level between any channels in the spectrum 15dB

PROPOSED BUILDING (G+4+R) ELEC/SPEC.167811
SPECIFICATIONS
6781 .
6. TV SOCKET OUTLETS.
These shall be installed at locations indicated in the drawings. All end sockets shall
be terminated with 75 ohm resistors. Total losses at socket outlets shall not exceed
4dBuv. The socket outlets shall be compatible with and of same manufacture as other
wiring accessories.
7. CO-OXIAL CABLES.
High-quality low-loss double-screened co-oxial cables shall be used throughout the

installation. The maximum loss of the main cable connecting the antennae to the sub-
main splitters boxes shall not exceed 17 dBuv/100 meters, and the maximum loss of
the distribution cable shall not exceed 24 dBuv/100 meters, both at 800 Mhz.
8. POWER SUPPLY.
Stabilized power supply of adequate capacity protected by fuses shall be provided.
RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
1. PHILIPS, France.
2. KATHREIN, Germany.
3. WISI, Germany.
4. KTI, U.S.A.
5. GRUNDIG, Germany
File: ELECSPEC16781.doc Page 16781

Master Digital Satellite and Terrestrial Antenna System of 4
SECTION - 16782
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION AND VIDEO

SECURITY SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
The Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission a high quality high
performance Closed Circuit Television and Video (CCTV) Security Surveillance System
Interfaced and Integrated with the Card Access Control System, covering selected areas of
the building, all in compliance with these Specifications and latest Dubai Police and
Authority of Tourism requirements with details indicated in drawings.
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1. The CCTV system shall be complete with, but not limited to, environmentally
compatible compact digital wide/narrow angle indoor fixed Indoor
wall/ceiling mounted cameras, Indoor PTZ dome colour cameras complete
with high quality lenses; Video Colour Monitors; Digital Video Recorders;
Matrix Switchers; keyboards; Consoles; all video co-axial interconnecting
cables and conduits/containment network and any other components and
accessories deemed necessary for a reliable, efficient and satisfactory
observation and surveillance system for the selected areas indicated in the
drawings.
1.2. The locations of the CCTV cameras indicated in the drawings are notional and
these may be altered to suit site conditions.
1.3. Prior to submitting his offer, the Contractor shall coordinate with the
manufacturer of proposed equipment to ensure all necessary components,
accessories, cables etc., other than those described above, shall be included in the
offer, as no claims for variations shall be allowed for lack of knowledge in this
respect.
1.4. Prior to placing order for any equipment, the Contractor shall submit, for
Engineer’s study, comments and final approval, relevant Specifications;
catalogues/descriptive technical literature; complete installation, operation and
maintenance manuals relating to the various components and accessories
proposed for the system.
1.5. Prior to commencing any installation works, the Contractor shall submit
comprehensive workshop drawings for Engineer’s study and approval.
1.6. The Contractor shall ensure all components of the system, particularly the
cameras, monitors, VCR etc. shall be manufactured to Internationally accepted
Standards by one manufacturer of international repute.
1.7. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, accessories and components
supplied shall be manufactured to stringent standards based on the latest
technology available in the market.
1.8. The Contractor shall ensure power supplies via 13A switch socket outlets will
be provided adjacent to each camera and all other CCTV system components.

Closed Circuit Television and Video Security Surveillance System
1.9. All equipment, component, accessories and materials shall be guaranteed by
the Contractor/ Manufacturer for a minimum period of two years after handing
over. The guarantee shall cover repair and replacement of defective materials.
2. SYSTEM CONCEPT
2.1. The Security Console comprising controllers/CPUs, TV monitors, VCR etc.

shall be located in each Security Room on the ground floor. Pictures on
dedicated monitors for each camera shall be observed for surveillance of all
areas simultaneously. In addition, manual/automatic Switcher on the Master
Monitor shall facilitate sequential viewing of pictures from all cameras in both
the floors.
2.2. The system shall be designed to operate on 12V d.c.
3. SYSTEM COMPONENTS, DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES
3.1. DIGITAL VIDEO SERVER (DVS) AND NETWORKED SERVER

SYSTEM
The various components of the DVS and Networked Server System shall
conform to the following Specifications:
3.1.1. DIGITAL VIDEO AND EVENT RECORDER
The System shall be run on the latest available Windows operating system. The
system shall provide recording capacity for 7 days and shall be complete with state-
of-the-art video motion detection software, powerful connectivity TCP/IP
connectivity via PSTN, ISDN and Ethernet with network management tool, and PTZ
software. The system shall be designed for recording, playback and live display,
enabling playback and live display while recording is in progress.
3.1.2. BUILT-IN MATRIX SWITCHER
3.1.2.1.The Video Matrix Switcher shall be digital microprocessor

based cross-point system comprising colour Video
Multiplexers, external controller/CPU, matrix input/output
bays, control keyboards, alarm interface unit, interface relay
unit, ASCII translator unit, receiver/driver units, Graphic User
Interface Software and complete with all necessary accessories
and components deemed necessary for a high quality high
performance video switching and control system.
3.1.2.2.The Video Matrix Switcher shall have the capacity for up to 16
cameras with 4 monitor outputs. The system shall be modular
in construction and shall be designed to be programmed for up
to 16 sequences, which can be run independently from each
other in either a forward or reverse direction. The matrix bays
shall provide for vertical interval switching of properly phased
inputs to all video outputs. The system shall be designed to

accept video input levels in the range 0.5 to 2.0 volts peak to
peak.
3.1.2.3.The Video Multiplexer shall be configured for desk top use and
shall be designed to record up to sixteen colour video inputs on
a single VCR with the following operational and performance
Specifications:
a) Duplex operation to facilitate video recording while
viewing live or playback video on full or multi-screen.
b) Automatic speed tracking that will facilitate VCR
recording speed to automatically adjust and control the
multiplexer record speed via the VCR’s head switching
pulse.
c) Provision of three monitor outputs, first for full screen
and/or multi-screen multi-camera viewing in live or
playback modes, second for full screen viewing of live
cameras and the third for automatic sequencing of full
screen viewing of live cameras.
d) Provision of time, date and camera title displays.
3.1.2.4.The control keyboards shall be equipped with a joystick and
shall provide complete control of all system functions inclusive
of the following :
a) Control of camera to monitor selection.
b) Control of Panning, Tilting and Zooming functions
of cameras.
c) Alarm monitoring.
d) Macro-programming and operation.
3.1.2.5.The alarm interface unit shall be connected directly to the
controller/CPU and shall provide for the monitoring of up to 64
contact closure alarm inputs.
3.1.2.6.The interface relay unit shall be designed to accept TTL inputs
from the controller/CPU and provide up to 64 single-pole
single-throw NO/NC selectable outputs for the operation of
external devices.
3.1.3. STORAGE AND ARCHIVAL
Records of up to 30 days shall be kept on the hard disk for immediate

accessibility. Outdated video shall be archived or overwritten or further
compressed and stored.
3.1.4. VIDEO MOTION DETECTION (VMD)
A motion detector module with three levels of sensitivities shall be

provided to monitor up to 16 camera inputs in real time. Any number
of areas may be selected for motion trigger in any one view.
3.1.5. TIME ZONES

A day shall be divided into 96 x 15 minute time zone slots. In each
slot, settings like date of recording, quality, actions to be initiated by
an ordinary alarm and/or VMD may be defined individually. Once
defined and named, a time zone may be used for any number of
cameras on any number of units.
3.2. CAMERAS
3.2.1. All cameras shall be aesthetically designed and shall be of small,

compact, lightweight and robust construction, housed in
tamper/impact resistant enclosures.
3.2.2. All indoor Dome cameras shall be of approximately 5” diameter and
of solid state compact construction design complete with variable
speed/high speed pan and tilt drive units, high quality 5-50 mm 10X
zoom lenses with 1/4” CCD interline transfer image format for
satisfactory surveillance with minimum illumination of 0.02 lux at
signal level of 50 IRE, high gain. The cameras shall be of high
horizontal resolution colour capable of 480 TV lines. The signal to
noise ratio shall be greater than 48 dB. The cameras shall be complete
with clear dome cover and built-in digital motion detector. The
cameras shall be capable of 360 degrees endless panning with
minimum preset panning speed of 240 degrees/second and manual
panning speed of 120 degrees/second. Remote control functions shall
be carried out with single co-axial cable. The pan and tilt drive shall
provide programmable limit stops for manual panning, auto/random
scanning and frame scanning.
3.2.3. All fixed cameras with or without pan/tilt heads shall be of 1/3” super
dynamic solid state CCD type complete with appropriate high quality
lenses for satisfactory surveillance with minimum illumination of
0.008 lux, with F1.2 lens. The cameras shall provide remote control
function with single co-axial cable and shall be complete with built-in
digital motion detectors, electronic sensitivity enhancers etc. All
cameras shall generally comply with the Specifications of dome
cameras described in item 3.2.2. above.
3.2.4. Cameras shall provide excellent picture quality under all levels of
illuminance, and shall adjust automatically to all light conditions.
3.2.5. Cameras shall provide instant pictures with no warming-up time and
burn-in effects.
3.2.6. All cameras shall be designed to be immune to the ill-effects of
vibrations, shock, magnetic fields, transients etc.
3.2.7. Externally installed cameras shall be housed and protected by robust
weather-proof enclosures to comply with minimum degree of
protection IP 65.
3.3. VIDEO COLOUR MONITORING SYSTEM
3.3.1. The Master Monitor shall be capable of switching and connecting

the number of cameras indicated in the drawings.
3.3.2. When switching from one camera to another, the blanking time shall
be negligible.

3.3.3. In addition to the ON/OFF/VOLUME, BRIGHTNESS and
CONTRAST controls, the following features shall be provided:
a) Manual Camera Selection.
b) Automatic Camera Sequencing
c) Sequencing Programming.
d) VCR Replay with audio/video input and output sockets for
connection to VCR and/or Slave monitor.
e) Alarm with Manual and Remote triggering and signalling.
f) Built-in audio-amplifier and loudspeaker for sound
productions from the active camera.
3.3.4. The monitors shall be high quality high resolution CRT and of solid
state electronic design. Colour video monitors with 21 inch colour
tube shall be for the multiplexed output monitor and 15 inch colour
tube for the sequential output monitor. The monitors shall be designed
for a minimum resolution of 450 lines (center) for 21 inch camera and
650 lines for the 15 inch camera with the geometrical distortion less
than 3%.
3.3.5. Each monitor shall be housed in a sturdy metal enclosure to reduce
radio frequency interference, and shall be equipped with an internally
regulated power supply.
3.4. VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDERS
3.4.1. Sufficient numbers of VCRs shall be provided to facilitate recording

of all cameras using multiplexers.
3.4.2. The operational and performance characteristics of the VCRs shall
comply with the following Specifications :
a) 6/18/30/54/78/96/102 hour time-lapse recording facility.
b) One-button recording check.
c) Super resolution option.
d) Search using alarm index, time and date, skip, counter
memory stop.
e) On-screen programming.
f) Interfacing and synchronizing with multiplexers.
g) Automatic head cleaning.
h) Elapsed time display.
i) Tape use counter.
j) 460 TVL recording/playback in super recolution mode with
standard VHS tape.
3.5. PANNING AND PAN/TILT MECHANISM HEADS
Panning and Pan/Tilt heads shall be of robust construction and shall be

suitable for the size and weight of respective cameras, and shall be complete
with all cabling and accessories up to the respective controllers in the Master
Monitor Room.
3.6. SYSTEM CONTROLLER
The System Controller shall provide the following controls :

i) Minimum 64 positions focus, zoom ratio and rotating modes
ii) Lens zoom ratio, focus and iris controls.
iii) Auto and manual Pan/Tilt controls.
iv) Camera position and setting controls.
RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
1. VISIOPRIME, U.K.
2. PANASONIC, JAPAN
3. PELCO, U.S.A.
4. SAMSUNG, KOREA
5. BOSCH, EU

SPECIFICATIONS ELEC/SPEC.16782-1
SECTION 16782-1
INTERCOM SYSTEM
DIGITAL AUDIO INTERCOM
DIGITAL AUDIO INTERCOM SYSTEM
1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

Conditions (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work applies to work of this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation, an Intercom system
in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
B. System shall be designed for communication between the main panel and the
audio unit inside the service rooms.
The entrance panel should be Stainless steel anti-vandal, digital with
alphanumeric information display and laser engraved matrix pad with infrared
area illumination.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cable routing and connections.
B. Submit product data for each item of equipment.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation Data: Include instructions for routine operation of master

and remote stations.
B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for minor troubleshooting, preventive

maintenance, and cleaning.
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
File: ELECSPEC16782-1.doc Page 1 of 4

Intercom System Digital Audio Intercom
Furnish service and maintenance of intercom system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERCOM SYSTEM - (Audio System)
A. Provide install connect and test intercom system including all equipments,
wiring and all necessary ancillary accessories for complete system.
B. The system shall have the following specifications.
- Laser –engraved Matrix keypad

- Alphanumeric information display
- LED system status indicators
- Total call secrecy
- Incorporates coded access function .
- System valid for one or more panel.
- Output for programming via PC
2.1.1 Main Panel
Modular designed main Panel should be compact, easy to be installed and

maintained. Dimensions should be adequate to permit installation where space is
limited. Electrical connections inside the panel should be easy and convenient to
make any maintenance or changing the service room name. It should be equipped
with:
Power Supply Unit
DIN rail or surface mounting, with terminal protection hoods.

Supplied with 240 Vac / 240Vac power module providing 12 /24 Vdc output.
2.1.2 Audio unit
Surface wall mounted unit supporting two keys for calling and receiving the main
unit.
The intercom unit shall be of professional quality with electronic call and optional
caretaker’s lodge call. The unit shall be White / Blue or Grey and shall have
extendible cord.
2.1.3 Wiring
Installation of the system is done with only 2 common wires.
2.2 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER

Refer To The Attached List of Recommended Manufacturers.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and

ready for use.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed.
B. Perform operational test on completed installation to verify proper

operation.
C. Replace equipment, components, and wiring to eliminate audible noise,

clicks, pops, or hum when system is in standby or operation.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Make final connections to units.
B. Perform field inspection and testing.
C. Demonstrate system operation.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration and instructions.
B. Employ manufacturer's field representative to demonstrate system

operation to designated Owner personnel.
C. Conduct walking tour of Project and briefly describe function,

operation, and maintenance of each component.
D. Use submitted operation and maintenance manual as reference during
demonstration and training.
END OF SECTION 11130 - 3

SPECIFICATIONS ELEC/SPEC.16783
SECTION - 16783
SOLAR WATER HEATER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-

CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90003 Active Solar Heating Design Manual
ASHRAE 90336 Guidance for Preparing Active Solar Heating Systems

Operation and Maintenance Manuals
ASHRAE 90342 Active Solar Heating Systems Installation Manual
ASHRAE 93 Methods of Testing to Determine the Thermal

Performance of Solar Collectors
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

Solar Water Heater System
FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH CORPORATION

(FM)
FM P7825 Approval Guide
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 National Electrical Codes
SOLAR RATING AND CERTIFICATION CORPORATION (SRCC)
SRCC OG-300-91 Operating Guidelines and Minimum Standards For

Certifying Solar Water Heating Systems
1.2 DEFINITIONS
The term "solar" for the purposes of this specification, covers systems that intercept solar
radiation and convert it to thermal energy. The thermal energy is collected by a heat transfer
fluid and sent to a thermal energy storage tank for use.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 Design Requirements

Design, furnish and install new solar water heating (SHW) systems for the heating of
domestic water. The solar water heating system offsets the use of natural gas, propane or
electricity by preheating water before the conventional domestic hot water system. System
types incorporating both freeze-protection and overheat protection are required. Freeze
protection is not required if climate is non-freezing, but overheat protection required in all
systems. Supplied equipment must be rated and warranted to withstand and operate under
lowest-record-low and highest-record-high temperature for the location. It is often the intent
to use the system for educational purposes related to the benefits and use of renewable
energy, so appearance and quality are considerations in design decisions.
Solar collectors are to be mounted on the roof or on the ground as suitable for the type of
SHW system and needs and limitation of the building and site. System must be of a type
suitable to the climate of the site. For systems proposed not under passive control, control
each system by a simple differential temperature controller. Provide a separate solar water
heating system for each building unit designated. Each of the solar systems is to incorporate
the existing electric water heating system as its auxiliary subsystem. In the event that the
existing electric water heater is in need of repair or replacement, the contractor may propose
to repair or replace the electric water heater under the scope of this project.

Include with each system, components that consist of a solar collector array, array support
structure, storage tank, interconnecting piping and fittings, tempering mixing valve, flush-
and-fill valves, pressure relief valves, and as required by the system type, any necessary
pumps, controls or heat exchangers, as well as all other accessories and equipment required
for the proper operation of the solar system.
Include with system all labor, supervision, equipment inside and outside the building, tools,
materials and incidentals necessary to design, procure, install checkout and place into
operation a complete solar water heating system ready for use for the building.
1.3.2 Performance Requirements

Solar water heating systems must be safe, reliable, require no operator intervention for
normal operation, be visually unobtrusive, and be designed and installed in accordance
with all applicable codes. Design and size the system so that solar energy supplies
approximately the percent of the annualized hot water demand (“Required Solar
Fraction”) specified in Table 1, below.
Table 1: Percent of annualized hot water demand to be met by solar hot water heating
system in each location covered in this solicitation:
Avg. Main
Require Gallons per Hot Water
Water
Building Location d Solar Day Delivery
Temperature
Fraction Demand Temperature
(F)
Any additional information provided regarding daily demand calculations, patterns of

weekly or monthly variations in the load or descriptions of end uses of the hot water can
be found in Appendix A.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following.
1.4.1 Approval drawings and Data
1.4.1.1 Commercial Products Data with Performance Charts and Curves

Annotate descriptive data to show the specific model, type, and size of each item.

PROPOSED BUILDING (G+4+R) SPECIFICATIONS ELEC/SPEC.16783
1.4.1.2 Solar System Design

Submit calculations of solar system performance leading to the proposed design. Submit
reports resulting from the use of any design or performance simulation software used in the
design.
1.4.1.3 Statements
Prior to installation, submit data showing that the Contractor has successfully designed and
installed systems of the same type and design as specified herein and proposed by the
contractor.
1.4.1.4 Drawings
Provide drawings for each system type and size containing a system schematic diagram; a
collector layout and roof plan (or ground lay-out) noting reverse-return piping for the collector
array; a system elevation; a schedule of operation and installation instructions; and a schedule
of design information including collector length and width, recommended collector flow rate
and pressure drop at that flow rate, number of collectors, number of collectors to be grouped
per bank, gross area and net aperture area of collectors, collector fluid volume, collector filled
weight, weight of support structure, and tilt angle of collectors from horizontal. Include in the
drawings, complete wiring and schematic diagrams, proposed pipe pitch and any other details
required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a
unit. Show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances for maintenance and operation.
Provide a detail of the joint connection between the solar collector mounting brackets and the
roof membrane.
1.4.2 Final Drawings and Data

1.4.2.1 Instructions
Submit proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets, including a system schematic,
wiring and control diagrams, and a complete layout of the entire system for each system type
to be installed. Include with the instructions, in typed form, condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system for normal
safe operation and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system, methods of
balancing and testing flow in the system, and methods of testing for control failure and proper
system operation. Submit collector array structural design information sealed by a
professional engineer.
1.4.2.2 Operating and Maintenance Manuals

Submit manuals that detail the step-by-step procedures required for system filling, start-up,
operation, and shutdown. Include in the manuals the manufacturer's name, model number,
service manual, parts list, and brief descriptions of all equipment and their basic operating
features. List routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, recommended
spare parts, troubleshooting guide, piping and equipment layout, balanced fluid flow rates, and
simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.
1.4.2.3 Field Test Reports

Submit reports of piping hydraulic pressure test.
Submit reports of water portability test.
Submit results of system performance testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Standard or Pre-approved Products
Furnish materials and equipment that are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products and which essentially duplicate items that have
been in satisfactory use for at least 6 months prior to bid opening.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Secure to each major item of equipment the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model
or serial number, and catalogue number on a plate.
2.2 PIPING SYSTEM

Provide a piping system complete with pipe, pipe fittings, valves, strainers, expansion loops,
pipe hangers, inserts, supports, anchors, guides, sleeves, and accessories with this specification
and the drawings. Pipe shall be designed to observe limits on flow velocity, pressure drop, and
gauge pressure associated with the pipe type and characteristics.
Provide, install and test the piping. Provide piping flow rates below 5 feet per second. Piping
shall be Type L or Type M copper tubing, ASTM B-88, with 95-5 tin-antimony soldered joints.
If cold water piping supplying the SWH system is of another type, such as PVC, it shall be

replaced within 10 feet of the SWH system with copper to avoid bulging and rupture due to
proximity to the higher temperatures of the solar system.
2.2.1 Pipe Insulation

PROPOSED BUILDING (G+4+R) SPECIFICATIONS ELEC/SPEC.16782.
Furnish interior pipe insulation and coverings such as Armaflex, Insul-Tube, Rubatex, or
approved equivalent. Provide outside array piping insulation with a capability of
withstanding 250 degrees F, except that piping insulation within 1.5 feet of collector
connections shall be capable of withstanding 400 degrees F. Protect outside piping insulation
from water damage and ultraviolet degradation with a suitable outer coating manufactured
for this purpose (aluminum, sunlight resistant PVC or approved equal).
2.2.2 Calibrating Balancing Valves (for multiple collector banks)

If systems are proposed with multiple collector banks, provide calibrated balancing valves
suitable for 125 psig and 250 degrees F service. Furnish calibrated balancing valves with
bronze body/brass ball construction with seat rings compatible with system fluid and
differential readout ports across valve seat area. Provide readout ports fitted with internal
insert of compatible material and check valve. Provide calibrated balancing valves with a
memory stop feature to allow valve to be closed for service and reopened to set point without
disturbing balance position, and with a calibrated nameplate to assure specific valve settings.
Provide calibrated balancing valves and ball valves at the outlet of each collector bank. The
balancing valves are specified to allow the array to be flow balanced. The ball valves are
required to enable the array to be disconnected for maintenance or repair. This requirement
for balancing valves is not applicable to systems of only one collector bank, where balance of
flow is not an issue.
2.2.3 Pressure Gauges

Provide pressure gauges with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and
shutoff valve. Furnish a 3-1/2 inch minimum dial size.
2.2.4 Thermometers
Supply thermometers with wells and separable bronze sockets.
2.2.5 Pipe Hangers and Supports

Support and hang piping so that the weight of the piping is not supported by drywall, siding,
or other building members not designed to bear load. Support piping so that thermal
expansion and contraction of pipe lengths is accommodated.
2.2.6 Valves
Provide valves compatible with the piping. Ball valves shall be used for shutoff, with full
port, bronze body, bronze ball and teflon seat. Bronze hose-end gate valves shall be used for
draining low points of piping.
2.3 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM
2.3.1 Solar Collector Construction

The type of solar collector proposed shall be compatible with the proposed system type.
Collectors shall be selected based on optimal cost and performance. Depending on the
temperature requirements of the system, collector may be unglazed (low temperature), single
or double glazed (mid temperature), or evacuated tube (high temperature) with selective or
painted absorber surfaces. Furnish collectors of weather-tight construction and with an
aluminium casing. Provide aluminium or stainless steel mounting brackets and hinges.
Furnish stainless steel assembly hardware including all bolts, washers, and nuts. Install
collectors such that tubes on the absorber plate drain by gravity. Provide cover glazing

completely replaceable from the front of the collector without disturbing the piping or
adjacent collectors.
2.3.2 Collector Warranty

Provide a minimum 10-year warranty against the following: failure of manifold or riser
tubing, joints or fittings; degradation of absorber plate selective surface; rusting or
discoloration of collector hardware; and embitterment of header manifold seals. Include with
the warranty full repair or replacement of defective materials or equipment.
2.3.3 Solar Collector Performance

Plot thermal performance on the thermal efficiency curve in accordance with ASHRAE 93
showing the product of glazing tranmittance and plate aborptivity and also the thermal loss
coefficient (btu/hr/F) of the solar collector. Show manufacturer's recommended volumetric
flow rate and the design pressure drop at the recommended flow rate. Indicate the
manufacturer's recommendations for the number of collectors to be joined per bank while
providing for balanced flow and for thermal expansion considerations.
2.4 SOLAR COLLECTOR ARRAY
2.4.1 Net Absorber Area and Array Layout

Collector array shall be oriented so that all collectors face the same direction. Space
collectors arranged in multiple rows so that no shading from other collectors is evident
between 1000 hours and 1400 hours solar time on December 21. Collectors should be south-
facing and a tilt equal to the local latitude, but other orientations may be considered for
approval. Indicate minimum spacing between rows.
2.4.2 Piping
Connect interconnecting array piping between solar collectors, in a reverse-return
configuration with approximately equal pipe length for any possible flow path. Indicate flow
rate through the collector array. Provide each collector bank isolated by valves, with a
pressure relief valve and with the capability of being drained. Locate manually operated air
vents at system high points, and pitch array piping a minimum of 0.25 inch per foot so that
piping can be drained by gravity. Supply calibrated balancing valves at the outlet of each
collector bank as indicated.
2.4.3 Supports for Solar Collector Array

Provide support structure for the collector array of aluminium, stainless steel, or other
corrosion-resistant approved material. Furnish a support structure which secures the
collector array at the proper tilt angle with respect to horizontal and orientation with respect
to true south. Consideration should be made to mounting collectors parallel to the pitched
roofs. The collector tilt angle may vary by +/- 25 degrees, and the azimuthal angle may vary
by +/-45% from the optimal tilt and azimuth. Provide a support structure that will withstand
the static weight of filled collectors and piping, wind, seismic, and other anticipated loads
without damage. For heavy systems, such as integral storage collectors, provide structural

reinforcement for the roof across at least four rafters and provide verification that the
structural modifications proposed are satisfactory. Provide a support structure which allows
access to all equipment for maintenance, repair, and replacement. Neoprene or EPDM
washers shall separate all dissimilar metals. Depending on system type, supports for solar
array could terminate in ballast blocks to avoid roof penetrations.
2.5 SOLAR PREHEAT STORAGE TANK

Provide cylindrical thermal energy storage solar preheat tank with a storage capacity of at
least 1.5 gallons per square foot of collector area. Insulate each tank with fibreglass or foam
with a loss coefficient of not more than 0.5 W/m2C. Protect the insulation by a PVC or steel
jacket. Provide a tank rated at 100 lb/in2 at 190 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide the interior of
each tank with glass lining for potable service.
2.6 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM
2.6.1 Heat Exchanger (if required by system design)

For system designs requiring a heat exchanger, provide a minimum design pressure rating of
100 psi. Construct heat exchanger of 316 stainless steel, titanium, copper-nickel, or brass.
Furnish heat exchanger with a capability of withstanding temperatures of at least 240 degrees
F. Tube-in-tube copper side-arm heat exchangers are acceptable for appropriate system
types.
2.6.2 Pumps (for active systems)

For active solar system designs requiring a pump, provide electrically-driven, single-stage,
centrifugal type circulating pumps such as those manufactured by Grundfos, Hartel, March,
Taco or approved equivalent. Support pumps on a concrete foundation or mounting intended
for the purpose, or by the piping on which installed if appropriate to the size. Construct the
pump shaft of corrosion resistant alloy steel with a mechanical seal. Provide stainless steel
impellers and casings of bronze. Control motors with switches that can be activated by either
the differential temperature controller or by manual override (Hand-Off-Automatic). Pumps
shall be installed with isolation valves so the pump can be serviced without draining the
system.
2.6.3 Heat Transfer Fluid

Heat transfer fluid shall be compatible with all materials in the system. The nature and
amount of heat transfer fluid will depend on the type of system proposed and the freeze
conditions encountered at the site. Any anti-freeze, conditioners or corrosion inhibitors
added to the heat transfer fluid must be non-toxic and intended for use in potable water
systems.
2.7 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM
2.7.1 Differential Temperature Control Equipment (if required)

If the system design includes controls, furnish the differential temperature control equipment
as a system from a single manufacturer. Furnish a solid-state electronic type controller
complete with an integral transformer to supply low voltage. Controller accuracy shall be
plus or minus 1 degree F. Supply controllers that are compatible with the thermistor
temperature sensors. Provide differential controls with direct digital temperature readings of
all temperatures sensed. Supply controls with a visual indicator when pumps are energized.

Provide a controller that will identify open and short circuits on both the solar collector
temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank sensor circuit.
2.7.2 Thermistor Temperature Sensors (if required)

Provide temperature sensors that are compatible with the differential temperature controller,
with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent at 77 degrees F. Supply sensors that have passed
an accelerated life test conducted by subjecting thermistor assemblies to a constant
temperature of 400 degrees F or greater for a period of 1000 hours minimum with an
accuracy of within plus or minus 1 percent as stated above. Furnish hermetically sealed type
thermistors. Provide immersion wells or watertight threaded fittings for temperature sensors.
Temperature sensors shall be mechanically attached to the surface they are measuring and
wire to the sensor must be mechanically attached and protected along its length.
2.7.3 Tempering Valve (VERY IMPORTANT)

All systems installed under this procurement action MUST have a tempering or mixing valve
to limit the temperature of the hot water supplied to the plumbing fixtures. The tempering
valve is to be located downstream of the electric water heater and is to be set to a temperature
suitable for the application.
2.8 ELECTRICAL WORK

If pumps are required in the system design, provide electric motor-driven equipment
complete with motor, motor starters, and controls. Provide electrical equipment and wiring
in accordance with NFPA 70. Furnish motor starters complete with thermal overload
protection and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Provide each
motor of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding
the nameplate rating of the motor.
2.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING

Furnish equipment and component items, with the factory applied manufacturer's standard
finish.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang piping
from sheet rocked or suspended ceilings. Keep interior and ends of new piping thoroughly
cleaned of foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during installation by means of plugs
or other approved methods. Discharge storage tank pressure and temperature relief valves
into floor drains. Horizontal runs should be flat and vertical runs should be plumb. Install
any multiple pipes in an order which does not require them to cross or interfere with each
other or other building systems. Provide air vents with threaded plugs or caps. Install
control and sensor wiring in conduit.
3.1.1 System Flushing and Disinfection

Flush and disinfect the piping system.

3.1.2 Collector Subsystem
3.1.2.1 Collector Array

Install solar collector array at the proper tilt angle, orientation, and elevation above roof.
Install the solar collectors with the ability to be removed for maintenance, repair, or
replacement.
3.1.2.2 Array Piping

Install collector array piping in a reverse-return configuration so that path lengths of collector
supply and return are of approximately equal length. Install air vents in the high points of the
collector array piping. Provide proper pitch for draining of collector array.
3.1.2.3 Array Support

Install array support in accordance with the recommendations of the collector manufacturer.
3.1.2.4 Pipe Expansion

Provide for the expansion and contraction of supply and return piping with changes in the
direction of the run of pipe or by expansion loops. Do not use expansion joints in the system
piping.
3.1.2.5 Valves
Install ball valves at the inlet and outlet of each bank of manifold collectors. Install
calibrated balancing valves at the outlet of each collector bank and mark final settings on
each valve. Install a union adjacent to each ball valve. Balance flow through the collector
piping with at least one balancing valve left in the open position. Locate tempering mixing
valve downstream of auxiliary water heater to control hot water delivery temperature.
3.1.2.6 Roof Penetrations

All roof penetrations shall be made permanently waterproof. Copper or other approved
flashing shall be used. Contractor shall provide a five year warranty on materials and labor,
including consequential damages, for any roof leaks due to or arising out of the solar water
heating system installation.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING
3.2.1 Instructions
Provide instructions for each system type. Include in these instructions a system schematic,
and wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the solar system. Prepare
condensed operating instructions explaining preventative maintenance procedures, balanced
flow rates, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for
safely starting and stopping the system, in typed form, framed as specified above, and posted
beside the diagrams. Post the framed instructions before acceptance testing of each system.
3.2.2 Acceptance Testing and Final Inspection

Maintain a written record of the results of all acceptance tests, to be submitted in booklet
form. Provide the following tests:

3.2.3 Hydrostatic Test

Hydrostatically test each system. Isolate valving and instrumentation not suitable for the
intended test pressure.
3.2.4 Operational Test

Operationally test each system over a period of 48 consecutive hours with sufficient solar
insulations to cause activation of the solar energy system during daylight hours.
3.2.5 Overall System Operations

Demonstrate each solar energy system will operate properly while unattended for a period of
at least 72 hours. As required by system design, demonstrate the system controller will start
the pumps after being warmed by the sun, and that it will properly shut down during cloudy
weather or in the evening over a minimum of three complete cycles. It is permissible to
manipulate the temperature of the storage tank by the introduction of cold water.
3.2.6 Temperature Sensor Diagnostics

As required by system design, demonstrate the controller will correctly identify open and
short circuits on both the solar collector temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank
sensor circuit.
3.3 FIELD TRAINING

Provide a field training course for operating and maintenance staff members after the system
are functionally complete. Include in the training a discussion of the system design and
layout and demonstrate routine operation, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures.
- End of Section –

SPECIFICATIONS ELEC/VEDOR LISTS
LIST OF ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS
File: ELEC/VENDOR LIST.doc Page 1 of 6






CHC
PROJECT

PROPOSED BUILDING (G+4+R )
JVC11BBMRA005 681-1358
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Prepared by
April, 2014

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

Section
Description
No.

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050‐1 PACKAGE AIR UNIT
15050‐2 FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS & HEAT REC0VERY
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15070 VENTILATING FANS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15081 DUCT INSULATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15100 VALVES
15122 METERS AND GAGES
15170 MOTORS
15241 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS
15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING
15738 SPLIT‐SYSTEM AIR‐CONDITIONING UNITS
15815 METAL DUCTS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Mechanical Specifications P a g e | 1


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15050 ‐ BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other
Division 15 Sections.

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
8. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Division 15
Section "Mechanical Identification."
9. Non shrink grout for equipment installations.
10. Field‐fabricated metal equipment supports.
11. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.
12. Cutting and patching.
13. Touchup painting and finishing.

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
Section 15050 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile‐butadiene‐styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. UPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

A. In addition to the requirements shown or specified, comply with the latest current applicable
standards, specifications or codes published by the following organizations:

AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BS British Standards
DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normalisierung
FM Factory Mutual
IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
ISO International Standardization Organization
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's
UBC Uniform Building Code.
UL Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.

1.5 DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. Climatic Conditions: The outdoor design conditions to be adopted for the project are as follows: .


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Climatic Conditions:


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

a. Latitude: 25, 25N
b. Longitude: 55, 33E.
c. Altitude: 5 m.
2. Outside Temperatures:
a. Dry Bulb: 46 deg.C.
b. Wet Bulb: 29 deg.C.
B. Indoor Design Conditions: Indoor comfort conditions are based on recommendations of ASHRAE
Standard 55.

1. The following table represents the indoor design conditions, which shall be followed:

Area Summer Winter

DB Deg. C % RH DB Deg. C % RH
+/‐
5%
Offices 23 50 22 ‐
Receptions 23 50 22 ‐
Lounges 23 50 22 ‐
UPS rooms, Telephone, IT 23 50 23
Rooms
Circulation Areas 23 50 24
Computer Room / PABX 22 50 22 ‐
Mechanical rooms 26 ‐ ‐
1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and
identification materials and devices.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.

D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical
equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building
components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and
coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:

1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve‐stem movement.
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including
space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
6. Fire‐rated wall and floor penetrations.
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during
construction.
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and
their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light
fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling access panels and other
ceiling‐mounted items.
11. Mechanical equipment rooms.
12. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.
13. Pipe sleeves.

E. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.

F. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: Provide a listing of recommended replacement
parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of supply, for equipment. Include in the listing
belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and style, and distinguished whether
of multiple belt sets.

G. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

H. Where US material or reference standards are specified or indicated, compliance with the
equivalent British Standard (BS) is acceptable.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.

B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,
capacities, and ratings may be furnished at no additional cost to the Contract, provided such
proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services,
circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, equipment spaces, and the like are increased accordingly.
If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet
design and commissioning requirements.

C. Equipment Vibration Tolerance:

1. The allowable vibration tolerance is specified in Division 15, Mechanical Vibration Controls
and Seismic Restraints. Equipment specifications require factory balancing of equipment to
this tolerance.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place, perform
field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified vibration
tolerance.

D. Products Criteria:

1. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization that maintains a
complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the site.
2. Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class
are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
3. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by
others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
4. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be
securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally
with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.
5. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.

E. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are
required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material
being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Resident
Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the
recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for
rejection of the material.

F. Provide copies of approved equipment submittals to the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Subcontractor.

1.8 WELDING

A. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the quality of the welding and shall:

1. Conduct tests of the welding procedures used by his organization, determine the suitability
of the procedures used, determine that the welds made will meet the required tests, and
also determine that the welding operators have the ability to make sound welds under
standard conditions.
2. Comply with ASME B31.1 and AWS B2.1.
3. Perform all welding operations required for construction and installation of the piping
systems.

B. Qualification of Welders: Rules of procedure for qualification of all welders and general
requirements for fusion welding shall conform with the applicable portions of ASME B31.1,
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications, and AWS B2.1, and / or, as approved by the
Qualifications."

C. Examining Welder: Examine each welder at job site, in the presence of the Resident Engineer, to
determine the ability of the welder to meet the qualifications required. Test welders for piping for
all positions, including welds with the axis horizontal (not rolled) and with the axis vertical. Each

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

welder shall be allowed to weld only in the position in which he has qualified and shall be required
to identify his welds with his specific code marking signifying his name and number assigned.

D. Examination Results: Provide the Resident Engineer with a list of names and corresponding code
markings. Retest welders who fail to meet the prescribed welding qualifications. Disqualify
welders, who fail the second test, for work on the project.

E. Beveling: Field bevels and shop bevels shall be done by mechanical means or by flame cutting.
Where beveling is done by flame cutting, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of scale and
oxidation just prior to welding. Conform to specified standards.

F. Alignment: Utilize split welding rings or approved alternate method for joints on all pipes above
50 mm to assure proper alignment, complete weld penetration, and prevention of weld spatter
reaching the interior of the pipe.

G. Erection: Piping shall not be split, bent, flattened, or otherwise damaged either before, during, or
after installation.

H. Defective Welds: Replace and re‐inspect defective welds. Repairing defective welds by adding
weld material over the defect or by peening will not be permitted. Welders responsible for
defective welds must be re‐qualified.

I. Electrodes: Electrodes shall be stored in a dry heated area, and be kept free of moisture and
dampness during the fabrication operations. Discard electrodes that have lost part of their
coating.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. The equipment supplied shall be packed for protection against damage during handling, transport,
warehousing and installation. The efficiency of the packing shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged items, at no additional cost, as
instructed by the Engineer even after delivery of the equipment, if it is proven that the damage
was caused by packing, storage, or handling deficiencies.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory‐applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.

C. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.

D. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

E. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.10 EQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

F. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building components.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

G. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.

H. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured‐in‐place concrete
and other structural components, as they are constructed.

I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before
closing in building.

J. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies,
and controlling agencies.

K. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."

L. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are
applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or British Standard for factory‐threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe‐Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos‐free, 3.2 mm maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full‐Face Type: For flat‐face, Class 125, cast‐iron and cast‐bronze flanges.
b. Narrow‐Face Type: For raised‐face, Class 250, cast‐iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full‐face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated; Bolts, Nuts and washers, stainless
steel for potable/domestic water piping, galvanized for other piping systems.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

D. Plastic, Pipe‐Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

F. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656

G. Flanged, Ductile‐Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon‐steel bolts
and nuts.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent
galvanic action and stop corrosion.

B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld‐neck end
types and matching piping system materials.

C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

D. Dielectric Unions: Factory‐fabricated, union assembly, for 1725 kPa minimum working pressure at
82 deg. C.

E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory‐fabricated, companion‐flange assembly, for 1035 or 2070 kPa
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric‐Flange Insulation Kits: Field‐assembled, companion‐flange assembly, full‐face or ring
type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035 or 2070 kPa
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized‐steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 107 deg. C.

H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 107 deg. C.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 860 kPa minimum working‐pressure rating, unless higher working pressure
is indicated, and ends according to the following:

1. DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
2. DN65 and Larger: Flanged

B. Stainless‐Steel‐Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless‐steel, inner tubing
covered with stainless‐steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.

C. Stainless‐Steel‐Hose/Stainless‐Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless‐steel, inner
tubing covered with stainless‐steel wire braid. Include stainless‐steel nipples or flanges, welded to
hose.

D. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of
NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 860 kPa minimum working‐pressure
rating at 104 deg. C. Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:

1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6 mm minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast‐iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep‐pattern type if required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.

1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw and polished chrome‐plated finish.
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge, set screw and polished chrome‐plated
finish.
5. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw and chrome‐plated finish.
6. Stamped Steel: One piece, with spring clips and chrome‐plated finish.
7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome‐plated finish.
8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome‐plated finish.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

9. Cast‐Iron Floor Plate: One‐piece casting.

C. Screws: Provide Stainless Steel screws for outdoor and wet applications

2.7 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.

1. Characteristics: Post‐hardening, volume‐adjusting, dry, hydraulic‐cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28‐day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS ‐ COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual
Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to
size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping at indicated slope.

D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service
areas.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal
runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25 mm clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:

1. Chrome‐Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome‐plated
finish. Use split‐casting escutcheons if required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast‐iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome‐plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set‐screw or spring clips.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof
slabs.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum‐board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other
wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend sleeve fittings below floor slab as
required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 6 mm annular clear space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN150.
b. Steel, Sheet‐Metal Sleeves: For pipes DN150 and larger, penetrating gypsum‐board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of soil pipe to extend
sleeve to 50 mm above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"
for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral‐curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise
indicated.

P. Aboveground, Exterior‐Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install Steel Pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.
2. Install Steel Sheet Pipe for sleeves 150 mm in diameter and larger.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.

Q. Underground, Exterior‐Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install Steel Pipe for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25 mm annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.

R. Fire‐Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Through‐Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing‐in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing‐in
requirements.

U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual
piping Specification Sections:

1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS' "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat
or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal
threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding
operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type,
and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat
and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
and uniformly using torque wrench.

V. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping DN50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to
each piece of equipment with DN50 or smaller threaded pipe connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection
to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION ‐ COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Engineer.

C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of
flow.
1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot,
uninsulated piping.
2. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and
accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior
nonconcealed locations:

a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each
pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious.
c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter nonaccessible
enclosures.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f. Spaced at maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in
congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.

B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic‐laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major
item of mechanical equipment.

1. Lettering Size: Minimum 6 mm high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less
than 600 mm, 13 mm high lettering for distances up to 1800 mm, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two‐thirds to three‐
fourths of size of principal lettering.
2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple
units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions,
and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or
provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow.

1. Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system,
locate signs near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 15 m.

D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished
construction.

3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of
paint.

B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic‐enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized‐Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic‐enamel finish. Include 2 finish
coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic‐enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic‐enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over
rust‐inhibitive metal primer.
5. Exterior, Galvanized‐Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic‐enamel finish. Include 2 finish
coats over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic‐enamel finish. Include 2 finish coats over
rust‐inhibitive metal primer.

C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory‐applied finish.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory‐painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.

3.5 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than
100 mm larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment
manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21 MPa, 28‐day
compressive‐strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast‐in‐Place
Concrete."

3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code‐‐Steel."

C. Floor Mounted Support: Provide base plate and concrete plinths beneath each floor mounted
metallic supports.

3.7 DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove Work specified in Division 15 Sections.

B. If pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove damaged
portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.

C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.

D. Work Abandoned in Place: Cut and remove underground pipe a minimum of 50 mm beyond face
of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.

E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from Project site.

F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.

3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3.9 GROUTING

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15050 – 1 ‐ PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING & ROOF TOP UNITS AND ACCESSORIES

CABINET:
Unit shall be complete with coil, fan, motor, drain pan, and all required wiring, piping, controls
and special features.
Unit manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification.
Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA – 90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation.
Unit shall be provided with 2 inch thick synthetic media cleanable filters selected on ASRA
1996 chapter 25 table 2.
Unit shall be selected at medium speed.
1. FAN AND MOTORS:
Fan shall direct drive; double width fan wheels shall have forward curved blades, and be
statically and dynamically balanced
Fan motor shall be 3 speed permanent split capacitor type with sleeve type bearings and over
sized oil reservoirs.
2. ROOM THERMOSTAT:
To provide 2-wire, modulating space temperature control in electronic systems

through thermostat-resistor element in which resistance decreases as temperature
increases.
Having the following features:
- Wall mounted.
- Temperature scale with set point adjusting lever.
- 3 speed of fan with "OFF ".
- Cover thermometer.
- Range 15-32 deg. C, thermometer scale 13-35 deg. C, sensor
resistance 1715 ohms with sensitivity of 15 ohms for each 0.5
deg. C temperature change
- Accessories including outlet box and mounting screws.
- Thermostat shall control air conditioning unit's compressors in steps
during summer season.
- Thermostat shall control electric heating coil in steps during winter.
3. CONDENSER AND EVAPORATOR COILS:
The direct expansion coils are constructed from seamless copper tube expanded into aluminum
fins.
All coils shall be tested at a pressure of 30 kg/cm2
Centrifugal Fans

Section 15050‐1 – Package Air Cond’tn and Roof Top Units and Accessories
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
Forward curved, directly connected to fan motor, statically and dynamically balanced and
designed for whisper quit operation. Materials to be high strength and corrosion resistant.
MOTOR
3-speed type, with built-in thermal overload protection and bronze sleeve type bearings with oil
reservoirs. Motor to be resiliently mounted.
Condensate Drain Pan
18 gauge galvanized steel, projecting under entire length and width of coil, drain pan shall be
epoxy resin coated insulated with fire retardant foam coating, Pan to be treated against
corrosion, insulated and pitched for positive drainage with unit installed level.
COMPRESSOR
Hermetic, R-22 reciprocating compressors shall be specially designed for heavy duty Middle
East conditions with built in oil pump.
Each compressor has internal spring mounting, external anti-vibration mounts.
The electric motor has F class insulation, 100% suction gas cooled and incorporates protective
sheet metal steel shield connected to the crankcase.
Each compressor motor is protected with:
- A low pressure safety switch.

- A high pressure safety switch.
- An internal over load protestor (against high motor temperature
- 5 years warranty for hermetic sealed compressor.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT:
This comprises followings elements:

- Evaporator and condenser air coils each constructed of copper tubing mechanically
expanded in aluminum fins.
- Refrigerant lines of copper tubing, de-oxidized, drier leak test.
- Expansion valves and check valves for refrigerant control.
- Filter driers in liquid lines.
- All units leave factory with R-22 operating charge.
CONTROL PANEL
All self contained units are supplied completely pre-wired in accordance with VDE code
requiring only the connection to the 3 phase supply and the installation of a suitable general
disconnect switch and fuses and connecting remote control thermostat.
When unit is delivered as split it required field interconnecting wiring and piping between the
evaporator and condenser sections.
The control panel is located in separate compartment and can be inspected without distributing
operation; the control panel contains the followings:
- Starting contactor and overload for each compressor.

- Starting contactors and overloads for evaporator and condenser fan motor.
- 24 volt control relays.
- 220/24 volt control circuit transformer.
- Solid state timer for each compressor.
- Voltage protector.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
- Control fuse.
- All appropriate wiring, terminals, and mains connections.
PROTECTION AND SAFETY
- High/low pressure control to protect the compressor against high discharge and low
suction pressures.
- Fan motors 3 phase external and internal protection located in their contactors and
windings respectively.
- Compressor 3 phase external and internal protection located in their contactors and
windings respectively.
- Crankcase heater to guard the compressor against floodback conditions and to eliminate
oil fluffing on start up.
- Timer to protect the compressor against short cycling by not allowing immediate restart
after a momentary power failure or when thermostat opens.
- Simultaneous starting of both compressor is prevented for dual compressor units
- Voltage protector against low voltage, phase reversal, and short cycling.
4. NOISE ATTENUATION
The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units where
necessary to reduce the air borne noise transmission through the distribution duct system; so
that the specified noise criteria levels are satisfied.
SOUND ATTENUATORS
Sound attenuators shall be located at upstream of supply air fan and downstream of fan return
air fan module to ensure effective sound reduction. The media shall be made of 60kg/m³
rook wool, UL (NFPA 90A) approval perforated galvanized sheet on the inner casing on outer
wall.
The selection and supply of sound attenuators shall be by specialist acoustic.
Attenuators or splitters of large cross section or length can be manufactured in modular section
as required for ease of site handling.
5. Fire dampers
Type - Dampers shall be manufactured to DW142 shall meet the local codes, the standards of
the "National Fire Protection Association" 90A and shall comply with BS 476. Dampers shall
be sized so that the free air space is not less than the connected duct free air space. Location
shall be as shown on drawings and as required by Local Authority.
Material - Frame shall be constructed 1.2MM galvanized steel casing to be unaffected by
corrosion of high heat. Mechanical parts shall have bronze or SS non-corrosive pins. When
closed, the dampers shall be held closed by a catch arrangement.
Fuse links - Fire dampers shall be arranged to close automatically and remain tightly closed
upon the operation of an approved fusible link or other approved heat actuated device, located
where readily affected by an abnormal rise of temperature in the duct. Fusible links shall have
a temperature rating approximately 76oC.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
Workmanship - Fire dampers shall be installed so as to provide the positive barrier to passage
of air when in a closed position. Dampers shall be installed so they will be self-supporting in
case of duct destruction due to heat. Care must be exercised that the frame will be set so that
closing device shall not bind.
Access Hole - Suitable hand hole openings with tightly fitted covers shall be provided to make
accessible for inspection and maintenance, or resetting.
Manufacture - Fire dampers and access doors shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the production of high quality products.
All fire dampers shall be UL LISTED supplied with a visual indicator of the damper blade
status, which shall be shown externally on the false ceiling.
The level of cleanliness and protection internal to the ductwork must be as defined in HVCA
document DW/TMC.
Provide fire dampers in all ducts over 125 sq.cm. in area, in the following locations,
whether or not specifically required by ordinances and codes:-
Duct entering and leaving fire shafts (duct shafts).
Ducts passing through designated fire walls.
Ducts through floors, and not encased in fire shaft.
Ducts leaving and entering plant area.
Ducts entering and leaving storage areas
6. GUARANTEE:
WARRANTY PERIOD SHALL BE FIVE YEARS FOR THE COMPRESSOR FROM

DATE OF COMMISSIONING.
END OF SECTION 15050 - 1

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
15070 VENTILATING FANS

1.0 In-Line Centrifugal Fan
The housing shall utilize galvanized steel (aluminum optional some sizes) “corner post”
framework and panels. Units shall be equipped with three removable access panels. Units
shall be pre-wired to a junction box on the exterior and equipped with an electrical disconnect
switch. Two support angles shall be provided.
Statically & dynamically balanced backward inclined, centrifugal wheels shall be aluminum,
spark-resistant, non-overloading, & matched to deeply spun venturis. Motors shall be
continuous duty, ball bearing design, permanently lubricated, mounted out of the main
airstream, & furnished at the specified voltage, phase, & enclosure. Shafts shall be turned,
ground, polished, & rust protected. Heavy duty ball bearings are rated for a minimum L50 life
exceeding 200,000 hours. Pulleys shall be adjustable, cast iron, machined, keyed, securely
attached, & sized for 150% of the horsepower at its rated maximum speed.
Each fan shall bear the AMCA Licensed Ratings Seal for Air and Sound Performance, and
shall be UL and CSA listed.
2.0 Axial Flow Fan
Inline axial fan galvanized construction with aluminum impeller with adjustable pitch angle
blades.
Direct driven, TEFC motor Class “H” ins. 2-Speed motor is supplied on some fans as per
requirement. Smoke Fans are suitable for 300°C/1hrs.
3.0 CENTRIFUGAL AIR BLOWER GENERAL
The centrifugal blower shall be of the rotatable belt driven/ direct driven type and SWSI/
DWDI. The blower shall be constructed of steel or aluminum with all seams continuously
welded for leak proof assembly. . All wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced and
shall be keyed to the shafts.
The blower shafts shall be AISI C-1040 or C1045 hot rolled and accurately turned and
polished. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the
bearings.
All bearings on the blowers in arrangement 10 shall be grease lubricated, precision anti-
friction ball self aligning pillow block type.
All drives for belt driven fans shall be designed for 165% of rated horsepower capacities.
Motor drives shall be variable thru horsepower. Oil resistant non-static belts shall be provided.
In general all type of centrifugal blowers shall include housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings and
structural support members as a factory assembled unit.
Fan motor shall be TEFC enclosure and class F insulation suitable for ambient temperature of
50 deg C.
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
Each fan shall bear AMCA licensed rating seal for air & sound performance & shall be UL &
CSA listed.
4.0 SMALL DUCTED INLINE
All the fans shall be cabinet type which should house the fan assemblies.
Small inline ducted ventilators shall be direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal blower type.
Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The
housing shall be constructed of aluminum and acoustically insulated for quite operation. An
integral aluminum back draft damper shall be standard. Blower and motor assembly shall be
easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork .Fans mounted on the roof
should be with epoxy coating & should be weather proof.
The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall
be factory tested prior to shipment. The unit shall be supplied with an internal wiring box and
receptacle. The fan rpm should not be more than 1400 rpm
The cabinet should be designed for quick transition from right angle discharge to top
discharge or into inline configuration without disturbing the power pack The discharge position
shall be adjustable by moving interchangeable panels supplied with removable fasteners and
should be field adjustable type Ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a mould
white plastic, aerodynamically designed grill with 85% free area
Inline ducted/Ceiling ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air
and Sound Performance. Ceiling ventilator performance shall be based on tests and
procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the
requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be
based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and
comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. In-line ducted/ Ceiling
ventilators shall be UL 507 and additionally listed for UL 705 listed and shall be CSA listed.
5.0 FANS AXIAL

Axial flow fans shall be capable of giving the design flow when tested to B.S. 848
Each fan shall be supplied with a suitably rated contactor/starter/isolator of approved pattern.
Fan casings shall be constructed of mild steel plates with angle stiffeners with the casing hot
dip galvanized after manufacture. The inlets and outlets of the axial flow fans shall be flanged
for connection to the system.
An access door is to be provided on the casings of all fans. Casings shall cover both impeller
and motor so that fans can be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork or other
components of the system. A flame proof external terminal box shall be fitted on the casing.
All lubrication points are to be extended to the outside of the casing and in a position that will
permit access in relation to the adjacent plant, services or building structure.
Impellers shall be die cast in aluminum alloy and X-rayed during manufacture. The impellers
shall be capable of running continuously at 20% in excess of the rated speed. The impeller
shall be keyed and locked on to the shaft, which shall be statically dynamically balances and
tested at over speed before dispatch from the manufacturer’s work.
Flexible connections shall be supplied and installed at both inlet and outlet of each fan.
The fan bearings shall be of the sleeve type wherever possible. The bearings are to be truly
aligned and rigidly mounted on to the casing.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
Graphs of the performance curve of each fan are to be forwarded to the Consultant together
with a test report on the sound level at three diameters in a free field condition prior to the
order being confirmed.
Axial flow fans are to be driven by electric motors of commercially silent pattern carrying a
makers guarantee in this respect. The motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled.
All motors are to be positioned to permit effective ventilation of the motor and all components
parts of the fans and motor are to be suitable to withstand the temperature conditions
expected in the fan.
Electrical connections to the motors shall be in a totally enclosed terminal box secured to the
exterior of the casing. Wiring within the axial flow fans shall be suitable for the conditions
within the casings.
A suitable steel support is to be provided for each fan, and the frame is to be fabricated from
rolled steel channel with adequate cross members for bolting the fan in to position. The frame
shall be of welded construction with anti-vibration mountings
6.0 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

All centrifugal fans, handling more than 1000 CFM. (500 l/s) shall have backward inclined
blades, unless shown otherwise.
Provide access doors on the fan scroll. Doors shall be hinged, in reinforced angle frames and
provided with clamping devices. Minimum size shall be 18” X 14” (450mm X 350mm) or full
width of fan scroll, if scroll is less than 18” (450mm) wide.
Provide drain connections at the low point of fan scroll or where shown. Drains shall be 1”
(25mm) pipe size half coupling welded in to the bottom of the scroll with a square headed,
threaded, brass plug.
Utility fans shall conform with the specification for centrifugal fans above with the exception of
the drive arrangement and belt guard. Drive shall be standard utility arrangement and belt
guard may be omitted if a hood is provided over the drive.
Centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
7.0 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

Fans shall be belt-driven in-line centrifugal units with backward inclined, aluminum fan wheels
in reinforced, zinc coated heavy gauge steel housings.
Motors shall be mounted on adjustable bases outside the air stream.
All internal components shall be accessible through removable or hinged access panels.
Provide disconnect switch mounted on the exterior of the fan casing.
Provide a matching wire mesh guard over the fan inlet and / or outlet if no ductwork is
connected at this location.
Twin fans shall have integral backdraft dampers, and two identical fans, motors and drives.
In-line centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
Fan casing shall be acoustically lined with 12mm thick acoustic insulation.
Fans shall be supplied with filter sections and washable filter media where noted. Filter
sections shall be closed couple to the fan.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
SECTION 15050 ‐ 2 – FRESH AIR‐HANDLING UNITS & HEAT RECOVERY DEVICES

9.1 This section covers the supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of the fresh air
handling units (FAHU) and the associated accessories. This section also applies to units with 100%
fresh air.

9.2 The fresh Air Handling Unit (FAHU) shall be factory fabricated, tested and of efficient design and
construction. The FAHU shall be draw‐through type and operate with low noise level. The FAHU shall
be supplied and installed with reference to the tender drawings and details as described in the
Schedule of Equipment Data. Each FAHU shall consist of but not limited to the following components:

a) Casing made of rigid coated aluminum frame and double wall panel (complete with 50 mm

thick insulation);

b) Fan assembly consist of fan wheel, fan motor, tapered‐lock pulleys and adequate number of
belts for transmissions;

c) Coil section with cooling coil of copper tubes and copper fins;

d) Filter section with filter housing and filter media;

e) Insulated dual pitched sloping drain pans stainless steel;

f) Hinged and removable access door for servicing;

g) Mixing chamber (if shown in drawings) for filtered fresh air and return air;

h) Vibration‐isolating bases, vibration isolator and other accessories necessary for operation,
and;

i) Weather proof roof for outdoor units.

9.3 The FAHUs and accessories shall be of compact design and construction and so selected to meet the
space and height constraints.

9.4 The FAHU model shall be Eurovent Certified or currently undergoing certification.

9.5 AHU Casing

9.6 The casing shall have perimeter frames assembled with double wall panels. All panels shall be easily
removed for the inspection and servicing of internal components such as fan assembly and cooling
coil. Removal of panel must not affect the structural integrity of the unit.

9.7 The panel shall be 25 / 50mm (indoor / outdoor) double wall type with injected CFC‐free
polyurethane foam insulation for a rigid construction. The density of the insulation shall be 50kg/m3.
The insulation of the panels shall be injected polyurethane with thermal conductivity (k value) of no
more than 0.02 W/(m/K).

9.8 Besides the cooling coil and fan assembly, the air passage of the AHU shall be design to ensure
smooth air flow. All exposed sheet metal edges shall be filed or concealed as much as possible. All
exposed insulation material shall meet UL94: Underwriter Laboratories Incorporated, Standard for
Safety and Flammability of plastic material for parts in devices and appliances.

9.9 Casing design must have thermal break on the frame, panel and access doors to prevent casing
condensation under mechanical room ambient temperature.

Section 15050 – 2 – Fresh Air And Heat Recovery
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

9.10 There shall be no exposed gaps between panels and between panels and frame. Casing shall be
designed to meet Eurovent Class B casing leakage requirement with leakage rate of no more than
0.80 l/s/m2 at 1000Pa.

9.11 Casing strength shall be designed to meet European Standard EN 1886:1998, casing class 2A with the
panel and frame deflection of no more than 4mm.m‐1 span.

9.12 The whole unit shall be mounted on a galvanized steel base rail. The base rail shall be used in lieu of
concrete plinth or other additional bases that are used at site.

9.13 The panel shall provide noise reduction characteristic of no less than 25 dB.
9.14 Fan Assembly

General

The entire fan assembly shall be mounted on a steel structure with vibration isolating base and
housed within the casing of an AHU.

Mechanical power transmission from the motor to the fan shall by means of tapered pulleys and V‐
belts of adequate size and number.

Air tight access panel or doors complete with approved gaskets, handles, latches and hinges shall be
provided for easy maintenance and servicing of the fan assembly. Inspection windows shall have
minimum size of 150mm x 150mm, double thickness, air insulated, re‐inforced glass panel mounted in
gasketed frame. Each access opening shall have a minimum of 900 mm (height) x 600 mm (width).

The fan shall be of forward or backward curved types as specified on the Schedule of Equipment
Technical Data. Fan wheels and shafts shall be statically balanced prior to assembly and dynamically
balanced to ISO 1940 as an assembly in the factory at design speed prior to delivery. Test reports shall
be provided for approval prior to shipment. Fan shafts shall be selected to operate well below the
first critical speed. Fan wheels and shafts shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum
rated speed and motor capacity.

Fan bearings shall be self‐aligned(concentric) type with adaptor sleeve bearing. Bearing shall be
maintenance free with permanently sealed lubricated ball bearing type. Bearing life shall be at least
300,000 hours based on rating life of L50.

All fan housings, shafts and impellers (wheels) shall be from the same fan manufacturer. Any mix
matching of fan components or modifications by party other than the fan manufacturer shall be
prohibited.

Fan shaft shall be of made of carbon steel (C45) machined and polished to tolerance of standard ISO
286‐2 – Grade G6. Protective coat of anti‐rusting shall be applied to all bare surfaces of the shafts.

Fan shall be selected to provide high static efficiency but low sound level and power consumption at
specified airflow rate. Selection of fan shall be as per equipment schedule. The fan performance shall
be tested and certified to ANSI/AMCA 210, ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 51 “Laboratory Method of Testing
Fans for Rating” and AMCA 300 “Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans”.

Fan Motors

The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with IP54 protection and class F
insulation with class B temperature rise complying with BS2757. The motor shall be of 4 pole with
standard 3 phases electrical supply of 380 V and 50 Hz.

9.15 The Coil:

Assembly

‐ The cooling coil shall be fabricated by the FAHU manufacturer. The cooling coil for the FAHU shall be
suitable for DX application.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

‐ The coil shall be constructed of copper tubes mechanically expanded into copper fins to enhance heat
transfer. Suitable provision shall be made to facilitate adequate draining and cleaning through
removable plugs at both ends of each tubes. Each set of coil shall be fitted with air vent at the highest
point.

‐ All coil capacities, pressure drops and selection procedure shall be rated in accordance to ARI

Standard 410.

‐ The coil shall be fitted with supply and return headers, made of steel pipes, to ensure even
distribution of chilled water throughout the coil.

‐ Coil shall be designed to utilize the full available unit cross section area.

9.16 Drain Pans & Drain Pipes:

All drain pans shall be double pitched sloping type to enable total condensate removal. Intermediate
drain pan shall be provided in the case of stacked coils. The drain pans shall be corrosion‐resistant,
insulated to prevent condensation and being installed right below the cooling coil. Drain pipes shall be
of uPVC laid with sufficient gradient, properly secured to the floor and terminated into the nearest
floor trap.

9.17 Mixing Chambers

The mixing chambers shall be of adequate sizes to ensure a thorough mixing of filtered fresh air and
return air. The construction, material and finishing of mixing chambers shall be identical to the of the
AHU casing. The fresh air intake shall be controlled by opposed blade dampers.

9.18 Filters

7.1 All AHUs and fresh air intakes and where indicated on the tender drawings shall be provided with
primary and secondary air filters of the type as specified herein.

a) Air filters shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 – 1992 Standard or an
approved equivalent standard. Reference shall be made to ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 – 1992
Standard or to relevant approved equivalent standard for definition of terms employed.

b) Air filters test shall be performed by an independent Testing Laboratory. Test certificates
shall be produced on request.

c) The filters shall be installed complete with all accessories and other minor necessary for
their satisfactory installation and performance whether individually specified or not.

d) Uniform air velocity through the media shall be achieved, if necessary by means of air
screens, baffles and other devices to approval.

Primary Filter – Pre filter

a) The filters shall have a rated average dust spot efficiency of not less than 25‐30% when
tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 – 1992 Standard atmospheric dust spot
method.

b) Both fresh and return air filters shall have pleated extended surface media. The filter
shall be throwaway type. Normal filter depth shall be 50 mm.

c) The filters, with non‐woven synthetic fabric media, shall be classified by the
Underwriter Laboratory as Class 2.

Secondary Filter for AHU

a) All AHUs shall be provided with Secondary Filter.

b) The Secondary Filter shall be of disposable medium efficiency type.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

c) Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency shall be 85% or above in accordance to
ASHRAE 52‐1‐1992 Test Standard. Filter shall be classified as Underwriter Laboratory
Class 2.

Filter Media and Frame Construction
a) Media Support Grid
The media shall be treated with adhesive and continuously laminated to a supported
steel wire grid. The media shall be sandwiched to maintain the designed space for each
pleat to maximize dust collection capacity and to avoid the possibility of media
oscillation and media being pulled away.

b) Enclosing Frame

The enclosing frame shall made of heavy duty, rigid an high wet strength double wall
beverage board. The frame, with two of its largest surfaces being die‐cut into mating
openings with diagonal supports, shall be a square box of about 50 mm depth capable
of totally encasing the filter media. The filter media shall be perfectly bonded to the
internal periphery of the frame to prevent air leak.

c) Rear Access Filter Frames

The rear access filter frames shall be in modular form with each module designed to
accommodate a standard size pleated filter. Constructed with galvanized steel, each
filter holding frame shall be equipped with holding clips to hold the filter.

d) Side Access Filter Frame

Side access filter section shall be accessible from the side of an AHU. The access panel
shall be sealed by gasket, double wall fastened with latches. Inside the section, standard
sized, 50 mm deep pleated filters shall be held by extruded aluminum track.

7.2 Filter Bypass Leakage Rate

Filter assembly shall be designed to meet European Standard EN 1886:1998, filter bypass leakage class.

HEAT WHEEL

ASHRAE Standard 62‐1989 that recommended level of outside air brought into buildings has been
increased. This imposes much higher latent and sensible loads on cooling and heating equipment.

Heat wheel is designed to recovers total energy (sensible and latent) to meets the requirements of indoor
Air Quality (IAQ), humidity control and to save energy.

The wheel made of aluminum heat storing matrix and with galvanized casing. The wheel is positioned in
39F Air Handling Unit so that it is divided into two half moon sections. Stale air from the conditioned space
is exhausted through one half while outdoor air is drawn through the other half in the counter flow
pattern. At the same time wheel is rotated slowly.

Sensible heat is transferred as the metallic substrate picks up and stores heat from the warmer air stream
and gives it up to the cooler section.

Latent heat is transferred as the synthesized metallic substrate condenses moisture from the air stream
that has the higher humidity ratio through adsorption (with a simultaneous release of heat) and releases of
moisture through evaporation (and heat pick‐up) into the air stream that has a lower humidity ratio.

Contractor shall submit the recovery wheel calculation to consultant for approval.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

CONDENSING UNIT

DESCRIPTION

Units shall be factory assembled, cool only, designed for outdoor mounted installation. The units hall be
factory wired, piped. All units wiring shall be both numbered and color coded.

UNIT CABINET AND FRAME

The main frame shall be constructed of extruded aluminum profile joined by 3D nylon reinforced ABS
plastic rounded corners forming the structural frame to house all internal components.
All cabinet panels shall be made from G90 pre‐plasticized sheets which are hot dip galvanized with PVC
coating, and shall provide an excellent resistance to UV & corrosion.

Panels shall be easily removable for inspection and maintenance, and shall be fixed to the frame with self
tapping screws. External skin of the panels shall comply with ASTM B117 standards suitable for 750 hours
salt spray test. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing and maintenance. Full perimeter base
rails shall be provided.

CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY

Each unit shall have three or four condenser fans / motors. The outdoor fans shall be of the direct driven
propeller type, discharge air vertically and shall be dynamically balanced for smooth operation. The fan
motors shall be totally enclosed IP54 with class F insulation. Motors shall have permanently lubricated
bearings and shall have external overload protection.

REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS

Compressors

a. Compressors for all models shall be Hermetic Scroll. All compressors shall be internally protected
with internal high pressure relief and over temperature protection. The compressors shall be
mounted on neoprene mounts to eliminate vibration from being transmitted to the unit structure
and cabinet.

Coils

a. Condenser coils shall have aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless internally enhanced
copper tubes with all joints brazed. Condenser fin spacing shall be limited to16 fpi for 30 Ton
models to maximize heat transfer while fin spacing shall be limited to 12 fpi in the 35, 40 and 50 TR
models to minimize blockage and high pressure operating condition. Special Heresite coating shall
be available as a factory option.

b. Condenser coils shall be of the direct expansion, draw‐thru, design. Coils shall be tested up to a
pressure of 450 psig.

Condenser

Refrigerant Circuit and Refrigerant Safety components shall include the following:

a. Filter drier / strainer to eliminate any moisture or foreign matter.

b. Accessible service gauge connections on both suction and discharge lines to charge, evacuate, and
measure refrigerant pressure during any necessary servicing or troubleshooting, without losing
charge.

c. The refrigeration system shall provide at least 15°F of sub cooling at design conditions.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

d. Unit shall operate with conventional thermostat designs and have a low voltage terminal strip for
easy hookup.

e. Unit control board shall have on‐board diagnostics and fault code display.

f. Standard controls shall include anti‐short cycle and low voltage protection, and permit cooling
operation down to 50°F.

g. Control board shall monitor each refrigerant safety switch independently.

h. Control board shall retain last 5 fault codes in nonvolatile memory, which will not be lost in the
event of a power loss.

END OF SUB‐ SECTION 15050

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15060 ‐ HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for hangers and supports.
2. Division 13 Sections on fire‐suppression piping for fire‐suppression pipe hangers.
3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation vapor barrier materials and thermal
hanger shield inserts.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibration
isolation and seismic restraint devices.
5. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP‐90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy‐duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

C. All hangers and supports installation details and any cutting and drilling in structural elements
shall be approved by the Engineer.

Section 15060 – Hangers and Supports
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal‐
hanger shield insert indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic and design calculations and stress analysis
calculations justifying forces, sizes, embedments,, and characteristics of components and
fabrication details.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.


A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire
protection system. Include listing and labeling by UL and FM approval.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each
multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.

D. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each
multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP‐58, factory‐fabricated components. Refer to
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support
types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field‐applied
finish.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are
in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA‐2, factory‐fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are
in direct contact with copper tubing.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Mechanical‐Anchor Fasteners: Insert‐type attachments with pull‐out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection
system shall include UL listing and FM approval.

B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory‐mixed and ‐packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,
hydraulic‐cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and
exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28‐day compressive strength.
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP‐69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal‐Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750.
2. Carbon‐ or Alloy‐Steel, Double‐Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes,
DN20 to DN600 , requiring clamp flexibility and up to 100 mm of insulation.
3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, DN15 to DN600 , if
little or no insulation is required.
4. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, DN15 to DN100, to allow off‐center
closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
5. Adjustable Swivel Split‐ or Solid‐Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, DN20 to DN200.
6. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, DN15 to DN200.
7. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,
DN15 to DN200.
8. Adjustable Swivel‐Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, DN15 to DN50.
9. Split Pipe‐Ring with or without Turnbuckle‐Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, DN10 to DN200.
10. Extension Hinged or Two‐Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, DN10 to DN80.
11. U‐Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, DN15 to DN750.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

12. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
13. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900 , with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast‐iron floor flange.

14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion‐type support for pipes,
DN65 to DN900, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support
and cast‐iron floor flange.

D. Vertical‐Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to DN500.
2. Carbon‐ or Alloy‐Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to
DN500, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger‐Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 49 to 232 deg. C piping installations.
2. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
3. Malleable‐Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types
of building attachments.
4. Steel Weld less Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg. C piping installations.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

F. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP‐69 and MSS SP‐89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

G. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field‐assembled channel systems.

1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Heavy‐Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping
and support together on field‐fabricated, heavy‐duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D‐1.1.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments
within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP‐69. Install additional attachments at
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at
changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to
forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

J. Install mechanical‐anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight
concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick.

K. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.

L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems,
to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion
joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

O. Supports exposed to external weather conditions shall be hot dipped galvanized with zinc coated
cut edges.

P. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers. Where pipe is supported by
insulation, provide galvanized steel shields and protection saddles. Where shields are used
on pipes 50 mm and larger, provide insulation inserts at points of hangers and supports.
Insulation inserts shall be of calcium silicate, cellular glass, minimum 128 kg/m3, molded
glass fiber, minimum 128 kg/m3, or other approved material of the same thickness as
adjacent insulation. Insulation inserts shall cover bottom half of pipe circumference and be
not less in length than the protection shield. Vapor‐barrier facing of insert shall be of same
material as facing on adjacent insulation. Seal inserts into insulation with vapor barrier
coating or weatherproof coating as applicable. Where anchors are secured to chilled piping
that is to be insulated, insulate anchors same as piping for a distance not less than four
times the insulation thickness to prevent condensation. Vapor seal insulation around
anchors.

2. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal‐hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

3. Install MSS SP‐58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

4. Install MSS SP‐58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall
span arc of 180 degrees.

5. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

a. DN8 to DN90 : 300 mm long and 1.22 mm thick.
b. DN100 : 300 mm long and 1.52 mm thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 : 450 mm long and 1.52 mm thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 : 600 mm long and 1.91 mm thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 : 600 mm long and 2.67 mm thick.
6. Thermal‐Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural‐steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support
equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.3 METAL FABRICATION

A. All fabricated channels and trapeze supports shall be hot dipped galvanized steel.

B. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy‐duty steel trapezes and equipment
supports.

C. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field‐weld connections that cannot be
shop‐welded because of shipping size limitations.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

E. All supports exposed to external weather condition shall be hot dipped galvanized with zinc
coated edges.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting.
Comply with SSPC‐PA 1 requirements for touching up field‐painted surfaces.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing‐
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15070 – VENTILATING FANS

1.0 In-Line Centrifugal Fan
The housing shall utilize galvanized steel (aluminum optional some sizes) “corner post”
framework and panels. Units shall be equipped with three removable access panels. Units
shall be pre-wired to a junction box on the exterior and equipped with an electrical disconnect
switch. Two support angles shall be provided.
Statically & dynamically balanced backward inclined, centrifugal wheels shall be aluminum,
spark-resistant, non-overloading, & matched to deeply spun venturis. Motors shall be
continuous duty, ball bearing design, permanently lubricated, mounted out of the main
airstream, & furnished at the specified voltage, phase, & enclosure. Shafts shall be turned,
ground, polished, & rust protected. Heavy duty ball bearings are rated for a minimum L50 life
exceeding 200,000 hours. Pulleys shall be adjustable, cast iron, machined, keyed, securely
attached, & sized for 150% of the horsepower at its rated maximum speed.
Each fan shall bear the AMCA Licensed Ratings Seal for Air and Sound Performance, and
shall be UL and CSA listed.
2.0 Axial Flow Fan
Inline axial fan galvanized construction with aluminum impeller with adjustable pitch angle
blades.
Direct driven, TEFC motor Class “H” ins. 2-Speed motor is supplied on some fans as per
requirement. Smoke Fans are suitable for 300°C/1hrs.
3.0 CENTRIFUGAL AIR BLOWER GENERAL
The centrifugal blower shall be of the rotatable belt driven/ direct driven type and SWSI/
DWDI. The blower shall be constructed of steel or aluminum with all seams continuously
welded for leak proof assembly. . All wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced and
shall be keyed to the shafts.
The blower shafts shall be AISI C-1040 or C1045 hot rolled and accurately turned and
polished. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact with the
bearings.
All bearings on the blowers in arrangement 10 shall be grease lubricated, precision anti-
friction ball self aligning pillow block type.
All drives for belt driven fans shall be designed for 165% of rated horsepower capacities.
Motor drives shall be variable thru horsepower. Oil resistant non-static belts shall be provided.
In general all type of centrifugal blowers shall include housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings and
structural support members as a factory assembled unit.
Fan motor shall be TEFC enclosure and class F insulation suitable for ambient temperature of
50 deg C.
Each fan shall bear AMCA licensed rating seal for air & sound performance & shall be UL &
CSA listed.
4.0 SMALL DUCTED INLINE

Section 15070 – Ventilating Fans
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
All the fans shall be cabinet type which should house the fan assemblies.
Small inline ducted ventilators shall be direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal blower type.
Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The
housing shall be constructed of aluminum and acoustically insulated for quite operation. An
integral aluminum back draft damper shall be standard. Blower and motor assembly shall be
easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork .Fans mounted on the roof
should be with epoxy coating & should be weather proof.
The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall
be factory tested prior to shipment. The unit shall be supplied with an internal wiring box and
receptacle. The fan rpm should not be more than 1400 rpm
The cabinet should be designed for quick transition from right angle discharge to top
discharge or into inline configuration without disturbing the power pack The discharge position
shall be adjustable by moving interchangeable panels supplied with removable fasteners and
should be field adjustable type Ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a mould
white plastic, aerodynamically designed grill with 85% free area
Inline ducted/Ceiling ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air
and Sound Performance. Ceiling ventilator performance shall be based on tests and
procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the
requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be
based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA publication 311 and
comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. In-line ducted/ Ceiling
ventilators shall be UL 507 and additionally listed for UL 705 listed and shall be CSA listed.
5.0 FANS AXIAL

Axial flow fans shall be capable of giving the design flow when tested to B.S. 848
Each fan shall be supplied with a suitably rated contactor/starter/isolator of approved pattern.
Fan casings shall be constructed of mild steel plates with angle stiffeners with the casing hot
dip galvanized after manufacture. The inlets and outlets of the axial flow fans shall be flanged
for connection to the system.
An access door is to be provided on the casings of all fans. Casings shall cover both impeller
and motor so that fans can be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork or other
components of the system. A flame proof external terminal box shall be fitted on the casing.
All lubrication points are to be extended to the outside of the casing and in a position that will
permit access in relation to the adjacent plant, services or building structure.
Impellers shall be die cast in aluminum alloy and X-rayed during manufacture. The impellers
shall be capable of running continuously at 20% in excess of the rated speed. The impeller
shall be keyed and locked on to the shaft, which shall be statically dynamically balances and
tested at over speed before dispatch from the manufacturer’s work.
Flexible connections shall be supplied and installed at both inlet and outlet of each fan.
The fan bearings shall be of the sleeve type wherever possible. The bearings are to be truly
aligned and rigidly mounted on to the casing.
Graphs of the performance curve of each fan are to be forwarded to the Consultant together
with a test report on the sound level at three diameters in a free field condition prior to the
order being confirmed.
Axial flow fans are to be driven by electric motors of commercially silent pattern carrying a
makers guarantee in this respect. The motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled.
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
All motors are to be positioned to permit effective ventilation of the motor and all components
parts of the fans and motor are to be suitable to withstand the temperature conditions
expected in the fan.
Electrical connections to the motors shall be in a totally enclosed terminal box secured to the
exterior of the casing. Wiring within the axial flow fans shall be suitable for the conditions
within the casings.
A suitable steel support is to be provided for each fan, and the frame is to be fabricated from
rolled steel channel with adequate cross members for bolting the fan in to position. The frame
shall be of welded construction with anti-vibration mountings
6.0 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

All centrifugal fans, handling more than 1000 CFM. (500 l/s) shall have backward inclined
blades, unless shown otherwise.
Provide access doors on the fan scroll. Doors shall be hinged, in reinforced angle frames and
provided with clamping devices. Minimum size shall be 18” X 14” (450mm X 350mm) or full
width of fan scroll, if scroll is less than 18” (450mm) wide.
Provide drain connections at the low point of fan scroll or where shown. Drains shall be 1”
(25mm) pipe size half coupling welded in to the bottom of the scroll with a square headed,
threaded, brass plug.
Utility fans shall conform with the specification for centrifugal fans above with the exception of
the drive arrangement and belt guard. Drive shall be standard utility arrangement and belt
guard may be omitted if a hood is provided over the drive.
Centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
7.0 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

Fans shall be belt-driven in-line centrifugal units with backward inclined, aluminum fan wheels
in reinforced, zinc coated heavy gauge steel housings.
Motors shall be mounted on adjustable bases outside the air stream.
All internal components shall be accessible through removable or hinged access panels.
Provide disconnect switch mounted on the exterior of the fan casing.
Provide a matching wire mesh guard over the fan inlet and / or outlet if no ductwork is
connected at this location.
Twin fans shall have integral backdraft dampers, and two identical fans, motors and drives.
In-line centrifugal fans shall be in accordance with the Fan Schedule.
Fan casing shall be acoustically lined with 12mm thick acoustic insulation.
Fans shall be supplied with filter sections and washable filter media where noted. Filter
sections shall be closed couple to the fan.

Rajesh Building
Proposed (B+G+4) Residential with Retail
Plot No. JVC 10 RMRA300, Al Barsha
SECTION 15075 ‐ MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.

B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard‐size bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space location of
valve, and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar
special uses. Besides mounted copies, furnish copies for maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.


A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size,
length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces
where devices are to be applied.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

Section 15075 – Mechanical Identification
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application
as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than one type is specified for application,
selection is the Contractor's option, but provide one selection for each product category.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or
stamped. Nameplates for external and wet applications to be stainless steel

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.

C. Pressure‐Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,
color‐coded, pressure‐sensitive vinyl type with permanent adhesive, complying with ASME A13.1.

D. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full‐band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each
location.

E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by the Engineer.

1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

F. Snap‐on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap on, color‐
coded, complying with ASME A13.1.

G. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard color‐coded, laminated plastic. Comply with the
following color code:

1. Green: Cold air.
2. Yellow: Hot air.
3. Yellow/Green or Green: Supply air.
4. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
5. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Nomenclature: Include the following:

a. Direction of airflow.
b. Duct service such as supply, return and exhaust.
c. Duct origin.
d. Duct destination.
e. Design liters per second.

H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color‐coded, pressure‐sensitive, self‐adhesive, vinyl tape,
at least 0.08 mm thick.

1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for larger
pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6 mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13 mm
sequenced numbers. Include 4 mm hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.8 mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum for indoor and internal applications,
and stainless steel for external and wet applications.
2. Size: 40 mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire‐link chain; beaded chain; or S‐hooks.

K. Access Panel Markers: 2 mm thick, engraved plastic‐laminate markers, with abbreviated terms
and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3 mm center hole for attachment.

L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each
page of valve schedule. Include screws.

1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5 mm, single‐thickness glass.

M. Engraved Plastic‐Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper‐base, phenolic‐resin‐
laminate engraving stock; Grade ES‐2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for
mechanical fastening.

1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment
identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self‐tapping, stainless‐steel screws or contact‐type, permanent adhesive.

N. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident‐prevention tags, of plasticized card
stock with mat finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 85 mm by 145 mm.
2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large‐size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.

O. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and
terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and
equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of
same name are indicated.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358


3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following method:

1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color‐coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20 mm
wide, lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.

D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following method:

1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color‐coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40 mm
wide, lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.

E. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms;
accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed locations according to the following:

1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark
each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in areas
of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.
8. All presently used services shall be classified under the aforesaid categories as deemed
relevant. If new services are identified and cannot be logically classified under any of the
aforesaid categories, then such services shall be provided with a new, separate abbreviated
standard, as approved by the Engineer.
9. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the abbreviations shall be imprinted clearly in
English letters of 12 mm height and 3 mm depth, as per lettering sample shown, on a 100
mm diameter, 10 mm thick circular cast‐aluminum stud which has an insert length of at
least 100 mm, to allow it to be set into concrete. The insert section shall have a thickness
sufficient to prevent break‐off of the stud and shall be provided with “back‐cut”
indentations to ensure that the route marker is firmly held in place by the surrounding
concrete.

3.2 VALVE TAGS

F. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory‐
fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

and lawn‐watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing‐in
connections of end‐use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.

G. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and with
captions similar to those indicated in the following:

H. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.

I. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:

1. Fire Protection: 40 mm, round.
2. Sprinkler: 40 mm, round.

J. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Fire Protection: Red.
2. Sprinkler: Red

J. Letter Color: According to the following:

1. Fire Protection: White.
2. Sprinkler: White.

K. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS

A. Install engraved plastic‐laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas
outlets.
2. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
3. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor‐driven units.
5. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar
equipment.
6. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
7. Packaged HVAC central‐station and zone‐type units, Variable Air Volume (VAV) boxes, fan
coil units, controls and components.
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.
9. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water‐treatment systems, and similar equipment.

B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign outside
concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar
concealment.

1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied
spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.

C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers,
provide arrows showing service and direction of flow.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at
maximum intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
work of this or other Divisions.

B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15081 ‐ DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes semi rigid and flexible duct, plenum insulation; insulating cements; field‐
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section "Through‐Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and

requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.


A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack
surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on
stainless‐steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free.

B. Thermal‐insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220.
Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal‐insulation materials, except cellular
elastomers, shall have a maximum flame‐spread classification (FSC) of 25 and a smoke‐developed
classification (SDC) of 50. Flame‐contributed classification (FCC) shall be as specified for the
application. These maximum values shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA
255.

C. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state. Adhesives, coatings,
and sealants shall have published or certified temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of
working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied,
if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

Section 15081 – Duct Insulation
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
2. Application of field‐applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation, adhesives, coatings, and field‐applied jacket. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 300 mm square sections of each sample
material.

1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field‐
applied finish material indicated.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to the Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers,
attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have completed successfully a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Fire‐Test‐Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL‐723, NFPA 225 or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to the Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame‐spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke‐developed rating
of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame‐spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke‐developed
rating of 150 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed
below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups according to
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Include the following mockups:

a. One (1) 3 m section of rectangular straight duct.
b. One (1) 90 degree square elbow and one 90 degree radius elbow.
c. One (1) branch takeoff.
d. One (1) transition fitting.
e. Four (4 )support hangers.

2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the Engineer.
4. Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain the Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on
segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Insulation conductance shall be maximum values, as tested at any point, not an average.
Insulation conductance found by test to exceed the stipulated maximum shall either be replaced
or augmented by an additional thickness to bring it to the required maximum conductance.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed‐cell, sponge‐ or expanded‐rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.

1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet‐Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg F).
4. Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability : 0.15 perm‐inch.
6. Noise Reduction: Up to 27 L for 20mm thick insulation.

2.2 FIELD‐APPLIED JACKETS

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, (measured
before factory application or installation), minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all
surfaces. Minimum tensile strength, 6.1 N/mm width. Jackets used on insulation exposed in
finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.

B. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, ASTM B
209M, and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with
insulation. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors.

1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor installation and 0.8
mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025 mm thick, heat bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

stainless‐steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and
conform to the following.

B. Adhesive‐Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.

1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 45 kg
for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

C. Adhesives:
1. Cellular Elastomer: Adhesive for cellular elastomer insulation shall be a solvent cutback
chloroprene elastomer conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I, and shall be a type approved by
the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the intended use.

D. Coatings:

1. Outdoor and Indoor Non‐Vapor‐Barrier Finishing: Coatings for outdoor and indoor non‐
vapor‐barrier finishing of insulation surfaces shall be pigmented polymer emulsion
recommended by the insulation‐material manufacturer for the surface to be coated and
shall be applied to the specified dry‐film thickness.
2. Cellular Elastomer Insulation: Finish coating for cellular elastomer insulation shall be a
polyvinylchloride lacquer approved by the manufacturer of the cellular elastomer for the
intended use.


3.1 EXAMINATION

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Seal joints and seams with vapor‐retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor‐retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor‐retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends
with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor
retarder.

L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3. Vapor‐Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation
to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Install vapor‐retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor‐
retarder mastic and pressure‐sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor‐retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure‐sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor‐retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor‐retarder mastic.

P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire‐rated walls and partitions.

Q. Fire‐Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves
for fire‐rated wall and partition penetrations.

R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at
top of floor.

1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends
with vapor‐retarder mastic.

3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with
rubberized contact adhesive. Insulation with pre‐applied adhesive is not permitted. Flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 93 degrees C. Seams
shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Insulation exposed to weather and
not shown to have jacketing shall be protected with two coats of UV resistant finish as
recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry. A brush coating of adhesive shall be
applied to both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. The adhesive shall be
allowed to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces.
Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after
application. Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.

B. Apply insulation to ducts and plenums as follows:

1. Follow the manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the duct and plenum
surface.
3. Install insulation sheets of the largest manageable size.
4. Apply full coverage of adhesive to the surfaces of duct and to the insulation.
5. Butt insulation joints firmly together and apply adhesive to insulation edges at joints.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

3.6 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.

C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:

1. Indoor concealed supply‐, return‐, and outside‐air ductwork.
2. Indoor exposed supply‐, return‐, and outside‐air ductwork.
3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork

D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment
1. Factory‐insulated flexible ducts.
2. Factory‐insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
4. Vibration‐control devices.
5. Testing agency labels and stamps.
6. Nameplates and data plates.
7. Access panels and doors in air‐distribution systems.

3.6 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply‐air ducts.
1. Material: Flexible elastomeric.

2. Thickness: 19 mm.
3. Field‐Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket where exposed to view or in mechanical rooms.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
B. Service: Return‐air ducts.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

C. Service: Outside‐air ducts.


3.7 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply‐air ducts.


a. Field‐Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket, 0.8mm thick.

B. Service: Return‐air ducts.


a. Field‐Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket, 0.8mm thick.



JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15083 ‐ PIPE INSULATION

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field‐
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.

1. Division 7 Section "Through‐Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and
requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
4. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.
5. Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for Preinsulated Piping.


stainless‐steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free.

B. Thermal‐insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220.
Adhesives, coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal‐insulation materials, except cellular
elastomers, shall have a flame‐spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke‐developed
classification (SDC) of 50. These maximum values shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E
84 and NFPA 255. Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied,
if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.

Section 15083 – Pipe Insulation
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field‐applied jackets.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and
intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50.
2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.
3. Jacket Materials: 300 mm long by DN50.
4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field‐
applied finish material indicated.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to the Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers,
attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Fire‐Test‐Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL‐723, NFPA 225 or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to the Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame‐spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke‐developed rating
of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame‐spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke‐developed
rating of 150 or less.

C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed
below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups according to
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Include the following mockups:

a. One(1) 3 m section of DN50 straight pipe.
b. One (1) 90 degree elbow.
c. One (1) tee fitting.
d. One (1) DN50 /DN 100 valve.
e. Four(4) support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One (1) strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One (1) reducer.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by the Engineer.
4. Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
5. Obtain the Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
8. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15
Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing
and testing heat‐trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have
satisfactory test results.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed‐cell, sponge‐ or expanded‐rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet‐Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity:  0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm‐inch.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 L for 20 mm thick insualtion.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in
preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.2 FIELD‐APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, (measured
before factory application or installation), minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all
surfaces. Minimum tensile strength, 6.1 N/mm width. Jackets used on insulation exposed in
finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.

B. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated
sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M, 3003 alloy, H‐14 temper. Aluminum shall be made from
smooth polished Temper Alloy. Straps shall be AISI 300 series corrosion‐resistant steel, 15 mils
(0.381 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, for pipe under 12 inch (DN300) diameter and 3/4‐inch
(20 mm) wide for pipe over 12 inch (DN300) diameter.

1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish 0.6 mm thick for indoor installation and 0.8
mm for outdoor installation, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025 mm thick, heat‐bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
3. Elbows: Preformed, 45‐ and 90‐degree, short‐ and long‐radius elbows; same material,
finish, and thickness as jacket. Elbows shall be deep‐drawn, die‐shaped, 2‐piece
components for long‐radius.
4. Pipe jackets shall have not less than 2 inch (50‐mm) longitudinal and circumferential lap.
5. Sealant for longitudinal and butt joints of aluminum jacketing shall be an aluminum‐
pigmented, butyl, polymer sealant with high‐butyl solids.

2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel‐Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with
jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be
continuous through all sleeves and openings. Anchors, supports and other metal projections
through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of
150 mm.

C. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.

D. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

E. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
F. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

H. Seal joints and seams with vapor‐retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.

I. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

J. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

K. Apply insulation with the least number of joints possible.

L. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor‐retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over
fittings, valves, and specialties.

M. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor‐retarder mastic.

1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal
tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor retarder.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and
shield.

N. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

O. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
P. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75 mm wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and
spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self‐sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 100 mm o.c.

4. Vapor‐Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor‐retarder mastic.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below‐grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor‐retarder mastic.

R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.

S. Fire‐Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of
fire‐rated walls and partitions.

1. Firestopping and fire‐resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through‐
Penetration Firestop Systems."

T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.

1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor‐retarder mastic where floor
supports penetrate vapor retarder.

3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 150 mm and less.
Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 150 mm shall not be stretched around the pipe.
On pipes larger than 300 mm, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3
of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings
shall be insulated with miter‐cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter‐cut pieces and shall be overlapped
and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation.

B. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
C. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness
as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
E. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and
attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit
access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check
valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer
basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of
air to the pipe surface.

3.5 FIELD‐APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50‐mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless‐steel bands 300 mm o.c.
and at end joints.

3.6 FINISHES

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply 2 coats of the
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

3.7 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment:

2. Vibration‐control devices.
3. Fire‐suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below‐grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome‐plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.


A. Inspection: Engage a qualified inspection agency acceptable to the Engineer, to perform the
following field quality‐control inspections, after installing insulation materials, jackets, and
finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

B. Inspection: Perform the following field quality‐control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:

1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by the Engineer.
2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various
pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various
pipe sizes.

C. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance
with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to the
Specification.

D. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to the
Specification.

3.9 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials.

B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness,
and jacket requirements.

3.10 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Service: Condensate drain piping.

1. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.
2. Insulation Thickness: 19 mm.


B. Service: Chilled‐water supply and return.

2. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:

a. Pipe, sizes up to DN 50: 19 mm.

b. Pipe sizes larger then DN 50: 25 mm

4. Vapor Retarder Required: No

C. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot‐gas piping.

Pipe, all sizes: 25 mm.
3. Field‐Applied Jacket: None.
4. Vapor Retarder Required: No

3.11 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose‐fill insulation, for
belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.

A. Service: Refrigerant suction.


a. Pipe, all sizes: 32 mm.

7. Field‐Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket, 0.8 mm thick

B. Service: Chilled‐water supply and return.


a. Pipe, all sizes: 38 mm.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

11. Field‐Applied Jacket: Aluminum jacket, 0.8 mm thick
12. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15100 ‐ VALVES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.

2. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature
classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement,
dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and
its application.

B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating at least 5 installed
units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of 5
years.

C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling,
and repairing.


A. Single‐Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements", under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for
power piping.

C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.


Section 15100 – Valves
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew‐point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.

1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising
stems.

B. Internal and external parts of all cast‐iron and ductile‐iron valves installed under ground, in
trenches, valve chambers or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with minimum 200
micron fusion bonded epoxy coating.

1. Valves Installed Indoors: Epoxy coating (min. 200 micron) shall be applied to internal parts
only.

2. Valves used for hydronic systems:

a. Valves Installed Indoors: Factory coating is acceptable.
b. Valves installed Outdoors: Epoxy coating (min. 200 micron) shall be applied to
external parts only.

C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this
Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special

operator features:

1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter‐turn valves DN150 and smaller, except for plug valves, which
shall have square heads. Furnish the Employer with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3. Chain‐Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 and larger, installed 2400 mm or higher above
finished floor elevation.
4. Gear‐Drive Operators: For quarter‐turn valves DN200 and larger.

F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to
receive insulation.

G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP‐45 bypass and drain connections.
H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
J. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall be provided.

2.2 GATE VALVES

A. Gate Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP‐80; Class 125, 1380 kPa cold working pressure (CWP), or
Class 150, 2070 kPa CWP; cast‐bronze body and bonnet, or EPDM lined solid‐bronze wedge,
copper‐silicon alloy rising stem, mechanical packing, threaded connections; and with aluminum or
malleable‐iron handwheel.

B. Gate Valves, DN65 and Larger: MSS SP‐70, Class 125, 1380 kPa CWP, ASTM A 126 cast‐iron body
and bonnet, EDPM lined solid cast‐iron wedge, brass‐alloy stem, outside screw and yoke,
mechanical packing, flanged end connections; and with cast‐iron handwheel.

2.3 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, DN100 and Smaller: MSS SP‐110, Class 150, 4140 kPa CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body
and bonnet, 2‐piece construction; chrome‐plated brass ball, standard port for DN15 valves and
smaller and conventional port for DN20 valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem;
Teflon seats and seals; threaded connections:

1. Operator: Steel handwheel.
2. Operator: Vinyl‐covered steel lever handle.
3. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
4. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
5. Memory Stop: For operator handles.

2.4 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP‐80; Class 125, 1380 kPa CWP, or Class 150, 2070 kPa
CWP; cast‐bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, silicon bronze‐alloy stem,
mechanical packing threaded connections; and with aluminum or malleable‐iron handwheel.

B. Globe Valves, DN65 and Larger: MSS SP‐85, Class 125, 1380‐kPa CWP, ASTM A 126 cast‐iron body
and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass‐alloy stem, outside
screw and yoke, mechanical packing, flanged end connections; and with cast‐iron handwheel.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP‐67, Class 125 1380‐kPa CWP, 1035‐ kPa maximum pressure differential,
ASTM A 126 cast‐iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless‐steel stem, field‐replaceable
EPDM sleeve and stem seals, flanged, lug, or grooved style:

1. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze, EPDM lined.
2. Disc Type: Elastomer‐coated ductile iron, EPDM lined.
3. Disc Type: Epoxy‐coated ductile iron, EPDM lined.
4. Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Standard lever handle, with latch lock.
5. Operator for Sizes DN200 to DN600: Gear operator with position indicator.
6. Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger, 2400 mm or Higher above Floor: Chain‐wheel
operator.

2.6 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP‐80; Class 125, 1380 kPa CWP, or Class 150, 2070
kPa CWP; horizontal swing, Y‐pattern, cast‐bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber
seat or composition seat, threaded connections.

B. Swing Check Valves, DN65 to DN 150: MSS SP‐71, Class 125, 1380 kPa CWP, ASTM A 126 cast‐iron
body and bolted cap, horizontal‐swing, weighted non‐slam, silent type, bronze disc, flanged or
grooved end connections.

PART‐3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

C. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.

D. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.

E. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.

F. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

G. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for
service, and freedom from defects and damage.

H. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3.2 INSTALLATION

I. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

K. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

L. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
M. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
N. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
O. For chain‐wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm above finished floor elevation.
P. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 THREADED CONNECTIONS

Q. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

R. Align threads at point of assembly.

S. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal
threading is specified.

T. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.

3.4 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

U. Align flange surfaces parallel.

V. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat
and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and
uniformly with a torque wrench.

W. For dead‐end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper
shutoff and retention.

3.5 VALVE END SELECTION

X. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN50 and Smaller: Threaded end.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 and Larger: Flanged.

3.6 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

Y. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe and ball valves for
throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and
arrangements. Refer to the Drawings also for the requirement of the type of the valve.

Z. Chilled‐Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, cast‐iron body.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140 kPa CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: EPDM packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze disc; or Class 125, cast‐iron body.
5. Butterfly Valves: Class 125, aluminum bronze, or elastomer‐coated ductile iron disc; EPDM
sleeve and stem seals.
6. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast‐iron
body swing check; ‐for pipe sizes DN65 and larger. ADJUSTING

3.7 ADJUSTING

Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before
final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15122 ‐ METERS AND GAGES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY
This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each meter,
gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings, and
location for each meter and gage.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies under
specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct‐mounting thermometers.

E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include data for the following:

1. Flow‐measuring systems.
2. Flow meters.


A. Comply with applicable portions of ASME and ISA standards or approved equal pertaining to
construction and installation of meters and gages.

B. Uniformity/standardization of meters and gages furnished, of a single manufacturer, shall be
maintained throughout the airport facilities.

PART‐2 PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg. C, with 1‐degree scale divisions.

Section 15122 – Meters and Gages
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

2.2 LIQUID‐IN‐GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E 1.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked‐epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,

230 mm long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180‐degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360‐degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D .Tube: Red or blue reading, organic‐liquid filled with magnifying lens.

E. Scale: Satin‐faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper‐plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit installation.

2.3 DIRECT‐MOUNTING, FILLED‐SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor‐actuated, universal‐angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115 mm diameter, glass lens.

C Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180‐degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360‐degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor‐bronze Bourdon tube pressure gage.
E Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F Scale: Progressive, satin‐faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

G. Stem: Copper‐plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit
installation.
2.4 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Description: ASME B40.3, bimetal type.
B Dial: 25 mm diameter.
C. Case: Stainless‐steel.

B. Stem: Dustproof and leak proof 3 mm diameter, tapered‐end stem with nominal length of

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

125 mm.

2.5 SEPARABLE SOCKETS

A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold
fixed thermometer stem.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless‐steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension‐Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than thickness of
insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat‐Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

2.6 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
thermometer.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2 Material: Stainless‐steel, for use in steel piping.
3 Extension‐Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than thickness of
insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.
4 Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5 Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6 Heat‐Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

B. All thermometer wells are not to restrict the flow or service flow and are not to be installed with
sections outside the service being monitored.

2.7 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES

A. Description: Flanged‐fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for
attaching thermometer.
1 Extension‐Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than thickness of
exterior insulation.
2. Insertion‐Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than thickness of
insulation lining.

2.8 PRESSURE GAGES

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor‐bronze Bourdon tube type with bottom connection; dry
type, for all purpose use. Liquid‐filled‐case type, for booster sets and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115 mm diameter, glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8.
D. Scale: White‐coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.

E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:
1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure.

2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

2.9. PRESSURE‐GAGE FITTINGS

A. Valves: DN8 brass or stainless‐steel needle type.

B. Syphons: DN8 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.

C. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, DN8 brass bushing with corrosion‐resistant porous‐metal disc of
material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2.10 TEST PLUGS

A. Description: Nickel‐plated, brass‐body test plug in DN15 fitting.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa minimum.

D. Core Insert: Self‐sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3 mm OD probe from dial‐type
thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg. C, chlorosulfonated
polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg. C, ethylene‐propylene‐diene
terpolymer rubber.
G. Test‐Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and carrying
case.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's operating
conditions.

2.11. FLOW‐MEASURING SYSTEMS

A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and
conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
2. Flow range of flow‐measuring element and meter covers operating range of equipment or
system where used.
3. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
4. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in liters.
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150 mm diameter,
or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.

1. Scale: Liters per second.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
C. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
D. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential‐pressure‐design, flow‐element fitting made for
installation in piping.
1.Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory‐primed steel; with brass fittings and attached tag with
flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50 and smaller elements and flanged or
welded for DN65 and larger elements.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa.
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg. C.

E. Pitot‐Tube Flow Elements: Differential‐pressure design with probe made for insertion into piping.

1. Construction: Stainless‐steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with brass fittings and
attached tag with flow conversion data.

2.12 TURBINE FLOWMETERS

I. Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in liters per second.

1. Construction: Bronze or stainless‐steel body and plastic turbine or impeller, with integral
direct‐reading scale.
2. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa minimum.
3. Temperature Rating: 82 deg. C minimum.
4. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
5. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in liters.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2‐1/2 percent.

2.13 FLOW INDICATORS

A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in piping systems.

1. Construction: Bronze or stainless‐steel body, with sight glass and plastic pelton‐wheel
indicator.
PART‐3 EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
applications where used.

3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic and chiller.
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air‐handling units and built‐up central
systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat‐recovery unit.
5. Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
6. Outside‐air, supply air, return‐air, and mixed‐air ducts.
7. Each duct thermometer support flange.

C. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are indicated.
D. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are
indicated.

1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.
2. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

E. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.

3.3 PRESSURE‐GAGE INSTALLATION

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure‐gage valve located on pipe at most
readable position.
B. Install dry‐type pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure‐reducing valve.
2. Building water‐service entrance.
3. Chilled‐water and condenser‐water inlets and outlets of chillers.
4. Inlet and Outlet of each hydronic coil in Air Handling Units.

C. Install liquid‐filled‐type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump, including fire
and booster pumps.
D. Install pressure‐gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.

3.4 FLOW‐MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install flow meters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.

B. Install flow‐measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each hydronic coil
in built‐up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install differential‐pressure‐type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and
downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible locations.

E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible locations.

F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by
manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION

A. Install flow meters and components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect flow‐measuring‐system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal‐energy‐flowmeter transmitters to meters.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358


A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory‐finished surfaces. Replace cracked

and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's
touchup paint.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15170 ‐ MOTORS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory‐installed and field‐installed motors.
1. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements

for motor‐driven equipment.
2. Division 16 Sections for application of motors with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size
and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.

B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.


A. Comply with related electrical Standards, referred to in Division 16.
B. Comply with DEWA regulations for electrical installations.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.

Section 15170 ‐ Motors
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

C. Motors 0.37 kW (1/2 HP) and Larger: Three phase, 400 V up to 150 kW (200 HP) and soft starters
or 11,000 V for 150 kW (250 HP) and larger.

D. Motors smaller than 0.37 (1/2 HP): Single phase, 230 V.
E. Frequency Rating: 50 Hz, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
G. Service Factor: According to IEC 60034 and 60072, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start, accelerate,

and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated
operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

I. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan‐cooled type, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Index of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55
K. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed the permissible limit for the insulation class based on 50 deg.
C (122 deg. F) ambient temperature, for outdoors conditions and 40 deg. C for indoor conditions
unless otherwise indicated.

L. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter rated and shall comply with
Division 16, Section “Motor Control Centers”.

2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS

A. Description: IEC 60034 and 60072, medium induction motor.

1. Design Characteristics: IEC Standards, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Energy‐Efficient Design: Premium efficiency – Class “eff1”, unless otherwise indicated.
Classification in accordance with the definition set by the “European Commission of Electric
Machinery and Power Electronics Manufacturers”.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have separate
winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double‐shielded, pre lubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B for motors located in air‐conditioned spaces
and Class F for motors located outside or in non air‐conditioned spaces.

B. Motors Used with Reduced‐Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method. Maximum permissible starting current shall be 5 times the Full Load Current (FLC).

C. Motors Used with Variable‐Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class F insulation.
3. Insulation: Class F.
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to IEC requirements for thermally
protected motors.
D. Rugged‐Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum service
factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings are
insulated with non‐hygroscopic material. External finish is chemical‐resistant paint over
corrosion‐resistant primer.

E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to IEC:

1. Measurement of winding resistance.
2. No‐load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High‐potential test.
5. Alignment.

2.3 SINGLE‐PHASE MOTORS

A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting torque
and other requirements of specific motor application.

1. Permanent‐split capacitor.
2. Split‐phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B for motors located in air‐conditioned spaces
and Class F for motors located outside or in non air‐conditioned spaces.
5. Energy‐Efficient Design: Premium efficiency – Class “eff1”, unless otherwise indicated.
Classification in accordance with the definition set by the “European Commission of Electric
Machinery and Power Electronics Manufacturers”.

B. Shaded‐Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW (1/20 hp).

C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power
supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature
rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor
temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Bearings: Ball‐bearing type for belt‐connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single‐phase motors.


3.1 ADJUSTING

A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt‐driven motors.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Align pulleys and install belts.

C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to motor terminal box and use
liquid tight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.

E. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC recommendations for“
Hazardous (classified) Locations”.

3.2 COMMISSIONING

A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation. Coordinate with the
commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a part.

B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and power.
C. Report unusual conditions.
D. Report current deficiencies of field‐installed units.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15241 ‐ MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases.
1. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger restraints.

2. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for flexible duct connectors.
3. Division 15 piping Sections for flexible pipe connectors.
4. Division 15 equipment Sections for HVAC equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator specified.
Include load deflection curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:

1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of vibration
isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments
to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails,
and base weights.
3. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints and snubbers.


A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and
qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for design and installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are
similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration and seismic
restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.

Section 15241‐ Mechanical Vibration Controls
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Project seismic zone is 2A with a zone factor of 0.15.
B. Building Importance Factor: 1.0.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic‐restraint devices with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire‐suppression‐system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast anchor‐
bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3 Sections.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 7 Sections.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Noise Criteria:
1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed

following NC levels:

Type Of Room NC LEVEL
Conference Rooms 35
Corridors 40
Lobbies, Waiting Areas 40
Offices, large open 40
Offices, small private 35
2. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the Contractor
shall select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels,
and ASHRAE requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in accordance
with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2001, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration.
3. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate for
the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to
occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of sound
absorbing material, such as furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy.
The room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power level
emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.
4. In the absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise levels
0.914 m from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria: For each piece of machinery in the human work
environment, the maximum airborne sound levels shall not exceed 84 dB A‐weighted scale,
continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB peak sound pressure‐level, impact or impulse, noise. Unless
otherwise specified the maximum equipment airborne sound power level in dB shall not exceed
the following data:

Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)
Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)

Equipment
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air Handling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79

Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Pumps 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72

C. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non‐reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed a self‐
excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second (0.20 inch per second) RMS, filter in,
when measured with a vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal, and
axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.
Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be made at the mounting feet.

D. Materials: Rubber shall be natural rubber. Elastomer shall be chloroprene. Shore A durometer
measurement of both materials shall range between 40 and 60. Inorganic materials such as
precompressed, high‐density, fibrous glass encased in a resilient moisture‐impervious membrane
may be used in lieu of specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this substitution is made,
specified deflections shall be modified by the manufacturing source to accommodate physical
characteristics of inorganic materials and to provide equal or better vibration isolation. Weather‐
exposed metal vibration‐isolator parts shall be corrosion protected. Springs shall be chloroprene
coated.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Floor Mountings:
1. Double Deflection Neoprene (Type N): Shall include neoprene covered steel support plated
(top and bottom), friction pads, and necessary bolt holes.
2. Spring Isolators (Type S): Shall be freestanding, laterally stable and include acoustical
friction pads and leveling bolts. Isolators shall have a minimum ratio of spring diameter‐to‐‐
operating spring height of 1.0 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of rated
deflection.
3. Pads (Type D), Washers (Type W), and Bushings (Type L): Pads shall be felt, cork, neoprene
waffle, neoprene and cork sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle,
or reinforced duck and neoprene. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and
neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50 pounds per square inch).

B. Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise noted and shall allow for
expansion of pipe.

1. Combination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall contain a spring and
double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50
percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15‐degree angular
misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.
2. Spring Position Hanger (Type HP): Similar to combination neoprene and spring hanger
except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and include a
secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while maintaining same position.
3. Neoprene (Type HN): Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type neoprene
isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger bracket by a
neoprene grommet.
4. Spring (Type HS): Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a
neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed operating
spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent between design
height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular misalignment without
rubbing on hanger box.
5. Hanger supports for piping 50 mm (2 inches) and larger shall have a pointer and scale
deflection indicator.

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

A. Rails (Type R): Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting height of equipment and
cradle machines having legs or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. To
assure adequate stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base
dimension but not less than 100 mm (4 inches). Where rails are used with neoprene mounts for
small fans or close‐coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate overhang of housing.

B. Integral Structural Steel Base (Type B): Design base with isolator brackets to reduce mounting
height of equipment that require a complete supplementary rigid base. To assure adequate
stiffness, height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension, but not less
than 100 mm (4 inches).

C. Inertia Base (Type I): Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour concrete into a welded
steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves. Level the
concrete to provide a smooth uniform bearing surface for equipment mounting. Provide grout
under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest dimension of base
but not less than 150 mm (6 inches). Form shall include 13‐mm (1/2‐inch) reinforcing bars welded
in place on minimum of 203 mm (8 inch) centers running both ways in a layer 40 mm (1‐1/2
inches) above bottom. Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations. Weight of inertia base
shall be equal to or greater than weight of equipment supported to provide a maximum peak‐to‐
peak displacement of 2 mm (1/16 inch).


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and anchor vibration‐, sound‐, and seismic‐control products according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator
baseplates to structural floors as required.

C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt
isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.

D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21 MPa concrete, and trowel to a
smooth, hard finish. Cast‐in‐place concrete is specified in Division 3.

E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.


A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operations.

B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.

3.3 SELECTION GUIDE FOR VIBRATION ISOLATORS

ON GRADE 3 m FLOOR SPAN 9 m FLOOR 12 m FLOOR 15 m FLOOR
SPAN SPAN SPAN
EQUIPMENT BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN
TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL
REFRIGERATION MACHINES
ROTARY‐ ‐‐‐ N 0.4 ‐‐‐ N 0.4 ‐‐‐ N 0.4 ‐‐‐ N 0.4 ‐‐‐ N 0.4
SCREW
PUMPS
UP TO ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ I S 1 I S 1 I S 1.7 I S 1.7

10 HP
BASE
MOUNTED 15 HP I S 1 I S 1 I S 1.7 I S 1.7 I S 1.7
THRU
40 HP
50 HP I S 1 I S 1 I S 1.7 I S 2.5 I S 2.5
&
OVER
AIR HANDLING UNIT PACKAGES
FLOOR MOUNTED:
UP THRU 5 HP ‐‐‐ D ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ S 1 ‐‐‐ S 1 ‐‐‐ S 1 ‐‐‐ S 1
7‐1/2 HP & OVER:
UP TO 500 ‐‐‐ D ‐‐‐ R S,TH 1.7 R S,TH 1.7 R S,THR 1.7 R S,THR 1.7

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358
ON GRADE 3 m FLOOR SPAN
9 m FLOOR 12 m FLOOR 15 m FLOOR
SPAN SPAN SPAN
EQUIPMENT BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN
TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL TYPE TYPE DEFL
RPM R R
501 RPM & ‐‐‐ D ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ S,TH 1 ‐‐‐ S,TH 1 R S,THR 1.7 R S,THR 1.7
OVER R R
NOTES:

1. The selection guide is applicable to the extent required on the Drawings or in related Sections of
the Specifications.
2. For suspended floors lighter than 100 mm thick concrete, select deflection requirements from next
higher span.
3. For separate chiller building on grade, pump isolators may be omitted.

4. Direct bolt fire pumps to concrete base. Provide pads (D) for domestic water booster pump
package.
5. For projects in seismic areas, use only SS & DS type isolators and snubbers.

6. Isolators not required where cooling tower is located on grade or on roof over mechanical room.

7. Suspended: Use "H" isolators of same deflection as floor mounted.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15420 ‐ DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage piping inside building
and to locations indicated.


1. Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary sewerage and
storm drain

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewerage from
building.

B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building.

C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building sewer
piping and inside drainage piping.

D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys wastewater and vapors from
fixtures and equipment throughout the building..

E. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:

1. uPVC: Polyvinyl chloride, unplasticized.
2. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin pipe.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working‐pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 30 kPa.
2. Storm Drainage Systems: 30 kPa.
3. Sewerage, Force‐Main Piping Systems: 690 kPa.

Section 15420‐ Drainage and Vent Piping
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.


A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform Plumbing Code “UPC”

and American Society of Plumbing Engineers “ASPE” data books.
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.

B. uPVC Plastic Pipe And Fittings: BS 5255 (partially replaced by series of BS ENs) and BS 4515: Part
1, for aboveground, BS 4660 for belowground, with solvent weld joints or joining materials to
relevant ASTM standard as specified below.


A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining
materials.

C. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.

D. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion‐resistant
metal band on each end.

1. Sleeve Type for Plain‐End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless‐steel band
assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined. Include the
following:

a. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal.
b. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
c. Bands: Stainless‐steel, one at each pipe insert.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar‐End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made to
match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include the
following:

a. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal.
b. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.

2.3 VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general‐duty valves. Use valves specified for "Domestic
Water Systems" applications.
3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Soil, Waste, Drainage and Vent Piping Above and/or Underground: Use the following:

1. All sizes : uPVC plastic pipe, and fittings.

D. Sewerage Force Mains, Above and/or Underground. Use the following: (equivalent BS Standard
suitable for working pressure and application is acceptable).

1. All sizes: uPVC Schedule 40 Plastic Pipe, and fittings.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.

3.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary and storm
sewer piping.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.

C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building storm drains and building storm sewers.

D. Extend building sanitary drain, force‐main piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.

E. Extend building storm drain, force‐main piping and connect to storm sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.

F. Install well penetration system at each service entrance pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve
seals.

3.5 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and
long‐sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short‐sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if
change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long‐turn, double Y‐branch and 1/8‐
bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.
Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of
flow greater than 45 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different
sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

B. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.
Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,
cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as
completed.

C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN80 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN100 and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
D. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
E. Install underground, uPVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. Provide concrete

protection for uPVC pipe installed at depth 1.2m or less.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C. uPVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to BS 5255 and BS 4515: Part 1.

3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION

3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:

1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 30 m
and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than
30 m.
4. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double‐rod hangers, with 10 mm minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for uPVC plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:

1. DN32 and DN40: Maximum horizontal spacing, 500 mm with 10 mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
2. DN50: Maximum horizontal spacing, 600 mm with 10 mm minimum rod diameter;
maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
3. DN65 and DN100: Maximum horizontal spacing, 900 mm with 12 mm minimum rod
4. DN150 : Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19 mm minimum rod diameter;
maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
5. DN200 through DN300: Maximum horizontal spacing, 2000 mm with 22 mm minimum rod

F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP‐69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.

B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
3. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each
connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN65 and larger.

C. Connect force‐main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:

1. Sump Pumps: Connect force‐main piping to sump‐pump discharge.
2. Sewerage Pumps: Connect force‐main piping to sewerage‐pump discharge.


A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by the
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Engineer.

a. Roughing‐In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing‐in after roughing‐in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by the Engineer to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If the Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the Engineer.

B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of the Engineer or, in absence of such
procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Roughing‐In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing‐in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 3 m of head. Water level must not drop from 15
minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent‐stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

system equal to pressure of 250 Pa. Use U‐tube or manometer inserted in trap of water
closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing
additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas
and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

C. Test force‐main piping according to procedures of the Engineer or, in absence of such procedures,
as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force‐main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static‐water pressure of 345 kPa above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow
to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be
repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed uPVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water‐based
latex paint.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15530 ‐ REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air‐conditioning applications, including pipes,
tubing, fittings, and specialties; special‐duty valves; and refrigerants.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying refrigerant
piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for pipe insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings, including pipe and tube
sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between
piping and equipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and installation of
the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure
proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:

1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping.

B. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant‐Containing Components and
Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled.

Section 15530 – Refrigerant Piping
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver to the
Employer.

1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct 1 test.
2. Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg of refrigerant.
3. Filter‐Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88M, Type B, drawn temper.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

A. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought‐copper streamlined pattern.


A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg‐1 (Silver).

2.4 VALVES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450‐kPa working pressure and 135 deg. C working temperature,
globe or angle pattern, forged‐brass or bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless‐
steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless‐steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder‐
end connections.

B. Packed‐Angle Valves: 3450‐kPa working pressure and 135 deg. C working temperature, forged‐
brass or bronze body, forged‐brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and
seat, molded stem packing, with solder‐end connections.

C. Check Valves DN25 and Smaller: 3450‐kPa operating pressure, 149 deg. C operating
temperature; cast‐brass body, with removable piston, PTFE seat, and stainless‐steel spring;
straight‐through globe design. Valve shall be straight‐through pattern, with solder‐end
connections.

D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 : 3100‐kPa operating pressure, 149 deg. C operating temperature;
cast‐bronze body, with cast‐bronze or forged‐brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with
mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall be straight‐through or angle pattern, with
solder‐end connections.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

E. Service Valves: 3450‐kPa pressure rating, forged‐brass body with copper stubs, brass caps,
removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder‐end connections.

F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ARI 760; 121 deg. C temperature rating, 2760‐kPa working pressure;
forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2‐way straight‐through pattern, and solder‐end connections;
manual operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1 solenoid enclosure with 13‐mm conduit adapter, and
24‐V normally closed holding coil.

G. Pressure‐Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or cast bronze with
pilot operator, stainless‐steel bottom spring, pressure‐gage tappings, 24‐V dc standard coil, and
wrought‐copper fittings for solder‐end connections.

H. Pressure‐Regulating Valves: Conform to ARI 770; direct acting, brass with pilot operator,
stainless‐steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder‐end connections.

I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and
ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.

J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ARI 750; thermostatic‐adjustable, modulating type; size as
required and factory set for superheat requirements; solder‐end connections; with sensing bulb,
distributor having side connection for hot‐gas bypass line, and external equalizer line.

K. Hot‐Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor unloading;
solder‐end connections.

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Straight‐ or Angle‐Type Strainers: 2960‐kPa working pressure; forged‐brass or steel body with
stainless‐steel wire or brass‐reinforced Monel screen, and screwed cleanout plug, with solder‐end
connections.

B. Straight, Non‐Cleanable‐Type Strainers: 3450‐kPa working pressure; steel shell with stainless‐
steel screen, with solder‐end connections.

C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450‐kPa operating pressure, 93 deg. C operating temperature;
forged‐brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color‐coded moisture
indicator, and solder‐end connections.

D. Replaceable‐Core Filter‐Dryers: 3450‐kPa operating pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring,
ductile‐iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and wrought‐copper fittings for solder‐end
connections; with replaceable‐core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless‐steel support, ARI 730
rated for capacity.
2. Filter‐Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid‐core sieve with activated alumina, ARI 730
rated for capacity.

E. Permanent Filter‐Dryer: 2140‐kPa maximum operating pressure, 107 deg. C maximum operating
temperature; steel shell, and wrought‐copper fittings for solder‐end connections; molded‐felt
core surrounded by desiccant.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

F. Flexible Connectors: 3450 kPa operating pressure; seamless tin‐bronze or stainless‐steel core,
high‐tensile bronze‐braid covering, solder‐end connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated,
pressure tested, minimum 180 mm long.

2.6 REFRIGERANT

A. ASHRAE 34, R‐22: Chlorodifluoromethane (for small size split units only).
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing‐in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn‐copper tubing.
B. Aboveground, within Building: Type B drawn‐copper tubing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."

C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.

D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full‐thickness insulation.

F. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.

G. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.

1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been
eliminated.

H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed
to mechanical injury.

J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot‐gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward
away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in vertical
runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,
unless expressly indicated.

M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
N. Provide bypass around moisture‐liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 .
O. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure‐regulating valves, expansion valves,
and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

P. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial movement
of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.

Q. Install replaceable‐core filter‐dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
R. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
S. When brazing, remove solenoid‐valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats, and
packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near
bulb of expansion valve.

T. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Install valve so that diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps. Do not
mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
3. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction‐
line pressure at bulb location.

U. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to
outdoors.

V. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15
procedures.

W. Charge system as follows:

1. Install filter‐dryer core after leak test, but before evacuation.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump, until temperature of 1.7 deg. C is
indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. Maintain vacuum for a minimum of 5 hours.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas and charge to 14 kPa.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Provide according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP‐69.

B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in length

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes.
Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B 88M.

1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.
D. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."

B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
formation of scale.

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor inlet and
outlet, for gage taps at hot‐gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of
strainers.

C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser
systems.

D. Install refrigerant‐charging (packed‐angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and
expansion valve.

E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporators,
and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install a full‐sized, 3‐valve bypass around each dryer.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot‐gas bypass valve. Install solenoid
valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Coordinate electrical
requirements and connections.

H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion‐valve outlet.
2. Install valve so that diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps. Do not
mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction‐
line pressure at bulb location.

I. Install pressure‐regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15.

3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot‐gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.

C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are
used.

D. Install moisture‐liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter‐dryers and thermostatic expansion
valves and in liquid line to receiver.

E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.

F. Install replaceable‐core filter‐dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before each
solenoid valve.

G. Install permanent filter‐dryers in low‐temperature systems, in systems using hermetic
compressors, and before each solenoid valve.

H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump‐out or pump‐down
compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines
from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts
down.

I. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb
vibration.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for electrical connections.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358


A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa . Perform final tests at 186‐kPa vacuum and 1380
kPa using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

C. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.

3.12 COMMISSIONING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 1.67 deg. C is
indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum
pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa.
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter‐dryer core in charging line. Provide full‐
operating charge.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15738 ‐ SPLIT‐SYSTEM AIR‐CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes split‐system air‐conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator‐fan and
compressor‐condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and
may be connected to ducts.


1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for isolation
pads, spring isolators, and seismic restraints.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices not packaged
with units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Evaporator‐Fan Unit: The part of the split‐system air‐conditioning unit that contains a coil for
cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.

B. Compressor‐Condenser Unit: The part of the split‐system air‐conditioning unit that contains a
refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in terms
of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations,
remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer‐installed and field‐installed wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of units
showing the full range of colors available for units with factory‐applied color finishes.

Section 15738 – Split Air Conditioning Units
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: For split‐system air‐conditioning units to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.

F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split‐system
units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal
performance characteristics may be considered.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.

C. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable of
working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.

D. Sound‐power‐level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating speed
selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not exceed 40dBa at low speed and
48dBa at high speed.

E. Sound‐power‐level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the test
procedures specified in ANSI S12.23. Sound‐power values apply to units provided with factory‐
fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained for the standard cabinet
models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate tests provided there is no
variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers, motor speeds, or relative
arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the building structure.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor‐bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast‐in‐Place
Concrete."

B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace components of split‐system air‐conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field
service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization.
System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR‐FAN COMPONENTS

A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on
back of panel.

1. Insulation: Faced, glass‐fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with polystyrene.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal‐expansion valve.

C. Fan: Forward‐curved, double‐width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
D. Fan Motor: Multispeed, PSC type.
E. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

2.3 FLOOR‐MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR‐FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.

1. Discharge Grille: [Steel with surface‐mounted frame] [Welded steel bars forming a linear
grille and welded into supporting panel].
2. Insulation: Faced, glass‐fiber, duct liner.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with polystyrene..


C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.

D. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.

2.4 WALL‐ OR CEILING‐MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR‐FAN COMPONENTS

A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain pans with
drain connection.


C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.

D. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.

2.5 AIR‐COOLED, COMPRESSOR‐CONDENSER COMPONENTS

A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep
holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casing.

B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal‐ and current‐sensitive overload devices, start capacitor,
relay, and contactor.

1. Compressor Type: [Reciprocating] [Scroll].
2. Two‐speed compressor motor with manual‐reset high‐pressure switch and automatic‐reset
low‐pressure switch.

C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

D. Refrigerant: Environmentally Friendly refrigerant.

E. Fan: Aluminum‐propeller type, directly connected to motor.

F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal‐overload protection.
G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Thermostat: [Low voltage with sub‐base to control compressor and evaporator fan].

B. Thermostat: [Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan,
with the following features:

1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24‐hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid‐crystal display indicating temperature, set‐point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan‐speed selection, including auto setting].
5. Interface with BMS

C. Thermostat: [DDC wall type. Refer to specification section 15900, clause 2.5–A]
D. Automatic‐reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft‐annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory‐insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator‐fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.

C. Install ground‐mounted, compressor‐condenser components on minimum 100 mm thick,
reinforced concrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Division 3, "Cast‐in‐Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation
with concrete base.

D. Install roof‐mounted compressor‐condenser components on equipment supports specified in
Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium‐plated
fasteners.

E. Install compressor‐condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static
deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic
Restraints."

F. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick‐connect fittings. Install tubing to
allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to be
disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve and
specialty arrangements.

D. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque‐
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory‐authorized service representative to inspect field‐
assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections,
and to prepare a written report of inspection.

B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and
retest.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory‐authorized service representative to perform startup service, and report results
in writing.

B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following:

1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.
2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity‐control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration
transmission to structure.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Engage a factory‐authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain split‐system air‐conditioning units. Refer to Division 1
Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15815 ‐ METAL DUCTS

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat‐oval metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air‐conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa.

1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to
ducts and installed in exterior walls.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for duct insulation.
3. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound‐control devices, duct‐mounted
access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

4. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
5. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for automatic volume‐control
dampers and operators.
6. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final adjusting
of manual‐volume dampers.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air‐moving and ‐distribution
equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct
system must be specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. Accompany requests for layout
modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results
without increasing system total pressure.

B. The Contractor shall submit coordinated services drawings before fabrication of ductwork. Any
modification required to duct layout for coordination with other services shall be at no extra cost.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

Section 15815 – Metal Ducts
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction.
6. Penetrations through fire‐rated and other partitions
7. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation,
seismic restraints, and duct attachment.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling‐mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling‐ and wall‐mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers
and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling‐mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate
and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

F. Record (As‐Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.


A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code‐‐Steel," for hangers
and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code‐‐Aluminum," for aluminum supporting
members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure
classifications higher than 500 Pa. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for completed Work:

1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
the Engineer. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

a. Four transverse joints.
b. One access door.
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.

3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup construction and
perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results.
4. Obtain the Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work.
6. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
7. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may
become part of the completed Work.


A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with
labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,
pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock‐forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation;
mill‐phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M , Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with standard, one‐side
bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for concealed ducts.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless‐steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 8 mm minimum diameter for 900 mm length or less; 10 mm minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to air stream to prevent erosion of glass
fibers. Duct liner shall be faced with black, strong, durable and dimensionally stable woven glass
fiber.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Thermal Conductivity (k‐Value): 0.037 at 24 deg. C mean temperature.
3. Fire‐Hazard Classification: Maximum flame‐spread rating of 25 and smoke‐developed
rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916.
5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as
recommended by the manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.

a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 23‐kg tensile, dead‐load test perpendicular to
duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting
more than 3 mm into air stream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire‐hazard classification
of duct liner system.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open‐weave fabric strips and mastics.

1. Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide; glass‐fiber fabric reinforced.
2. Tape Sealing System: Woven‐fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound
and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard,
durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One‐part, nonsag, solvent‐release‐curing, polymerized butyl
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One‐part, acid‐curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying
with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder‐actuated fasteners, or structural‐steel fasteners
appropriate for building materials.

1. Use powder‐actuated concrete fasteners for standard‐weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 100 mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder‐actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight‐aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, all‐threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all‐thread rod.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal
and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self‐tapping metal screws; compatible with
duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Supports for Galvanized‐Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless‐Steel Ducts: Stainless‐steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal
and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie‐
rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
and discolorations.

B. Static‐Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:

1. Supply Ducts, Constant Volume and Upstream of Terminal Units: 1500 Pa.
2. Supply Ducts, Downstream of Terminal Units: 500 Pa.
3. Return Ducts: 500 Pa, negative pressure.
4. Exhaust Ducts: 500 Pa, negative pressure.

C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480 mm and larger and 0.9
mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined.

2.6 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at
liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are
prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted‐edge

overlapping.

E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless
duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7 m/s.

G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding 300
mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the air stream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:

1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.

I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified for
duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct
without compressing insulation.

1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 2.4 mm diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies,
and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are
optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate
liner at fire dampers at connection to fire‐damper sleeve.

2.7 ROUND AND FLAT‐OVAL DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Diameter as applied to flat‐oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of round
duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat‐oval duct.

B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of spiral seam, galvanized steel according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal and Flexible."

C. Flat‐Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt‐welded
longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal and
Flexible."
1. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500 Pa:

a. Ducts 75 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.
b. Ducts 685 to 915 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 940 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 500 to 2490 Pa:

a. Ducts 75 to 355 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.
b. Ducts 380 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 685 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.

3. Flat‐Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as longitudinal
seam flat‐oval duct.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

4. 90‐Degree, Two‐Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems
for material‐handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using
1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single‐thickness turning vanes.
5. Round Elbows, 200 mm and Smaller: Fabricate die‐formed elbows for 45‐ and 90‐degree
elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard
bend‐angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
6. Round Elbows, 225 through 355 mm: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and
90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard
bend‐angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.
7. Round Elbows, Larger Than 355 mm, and All Flat‐Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows,
unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
8. Die‐Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200 mm and All Pressures: 1.0 mm thick with two‐
piece welded construction.
9. Round Gored‐Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non‐elbow fittings specified above.
10. Flat‐Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat‐oval duct specified above.
11. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355 mm and Pressures through 2490 Pa: 0.55 mm.

2.9 FIRE STOPPING
C
A. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through
penetration fire stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and
floors, having fire resistance ratings.


3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
C. Install round and flat‐oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7 m, unless interrupted by fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to
building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25 mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
unless specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire‐ and smoke‐control dampers, lighting layouts, and
similar finished work.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

M. Where ducts are exposed to view in machine rooms and in spaces without suspended ceiling,
cover with aluminum jacketing to protect against accidental damage.

N. Non‐Fire‐Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four
sides by at least 38 mm.

O. Fire‐Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers
are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation
methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through‐Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.2 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat‐oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal and Flexible."

B. Support horizontal ducts within 600 mm of each elbow and within 1200 mm of each branch
intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 5 m and at each floor.

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one‐fourth of failure
(proof‐test) load.

E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

F. Install powder‐actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Do not
use powder‐actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight‐aggregate concretes or for slabs less than
100 mm thick.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards‐‐Metal and Flexible."


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage
testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B. Conduct tests, in presence of the Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure
of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system
at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design
operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of system by relating leakage to surface area of
test section.

D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round
and flat‐oval ducts, and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 500 to 2490 Pa.

E. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.

F. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."
G. Perform leakage test on supply ducts constructed to pressure higher than 500 Pa.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust volume‐control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system.
Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15820 ‐ DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual‐volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Turning vanes.
6. Duct‐mounted access doors and panels.
7. Flexible ducts.
9. Duct accessory hardware.

1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to
ducts and installed in exterior walls.
2. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct‐mounted fire and smoke detectors.
3. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."
4. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic
damper actuators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Manual‐volume dampers.
3. Fire and smoke dampers.
4. Duct silencers.
5. Duct‐mounted access doors and panels.
6. Flexible ducts.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field
connection. Detail the following:

Section 15820 – Duct Accessories
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Special fittings and manual‐ and automatic‐volume‐damper installations.
2. Fire‐ and smoke‐damper installations, including sleeves and duct‐mounted access doors
and panels.

C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self‐noise power levels;
and airflow performance data, static‐pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock‐forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating designation;
mill‐phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one‐side
bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized,
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless‐steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 8 mm minimum diameter for 900 mm length or less; 10 mm minimum
diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. Dampers shall not produce noise
while in operation.

B. Frame: 1.3 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
C. Frame: 1.6 mm thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

D. Blades: 0.6 mm thick, roll‐formed aluminum.
E. Blades: 1.2 mm thick aluminum sheet.
F. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
G. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
H. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.3 MANUAL‐VOLUME DAMPERS

A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for
stability. Include locking device to hold single‐blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.
Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classifications of 500 Pa or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles
full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

B. Low‐Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple‐ or single‐blade, parallel‐ or opposed‐blade design as
indicated, low‐leakage rating, with linkage outside air stream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat‐shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 1.6 mm thick, with
mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls;
and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Aluminum Frames: Hat‐shaped, 1.6 mm thick, extruded‐aluminum channels; frames with
flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for
installing in ducts.
3. Roll‐Formed Steel Blades: 1.6 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
4. Roll‐Formed Aluminum Blades: 2.5 mm thick aluminum sheet.
5. Extruded‐Aluminum Blades: 1.2 mm thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
7. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

C. Jackshaft: 25 mm diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe‐bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple‐damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of a
multiple‐damper assembly.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

D. Damper Hardware: Zinc‐plated, die‐cast core with dial and handle made of 2.4 mm thick zinc‐
plated steel, and a 19 mm hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating‐rod
size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555.

B. Fire Rating: One and one‐half hours.

C. Fire Rating: One and one‐half and three hours.

D. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in air stream; fabricated with roll‐formed, 0.85 mm thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of air stream; fabricated with roll‐formed, 0.85 mm thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory‐ or field‐installed galvanized, sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3 mm or 3.5 mm thick as indicated, and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame
complies with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll‐formed, interlocking, 0.85 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking
blades, use full‐length, 0.85 mm thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless‐steel negator closure spring.
J. Fusible Link: Replaceable, [74] [100] deg. C rated.

2.5 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled for one‐and‐
one‐half‐hour rating to UL 555.

B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, [74] or [100] deg. C rated.

C. Frame and Blades: 1.6 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory‐installed, 1.3 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length to suit wall or
floor application.

E. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two‐position action.

1. Permanent‐Split‐Capacitor or Shaded‐Pole Motors: With oil‐immersed and sealed gear
trains.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Spring‐Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral‐spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 17
N x m.
3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside‐Air Intakes: Equip with O‐ring gaskets designed to
make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg. C .
4. Nonspring‐Return Motors: For dampers larger than 2.3 sq. m, size motor for running
torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 34 N x m.
5. Two‐Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
6. Two‐Position Motor: 400 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
7. Modulating, Spring‐Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
8. Modulating, Spring‐Return Motor: 400 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.

2.6 DUCT SILENCERS

A. General: Factory‐fabricated and ‐tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance
characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.

B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have fire
ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested according to
ASTM E 84.

C. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.85 mm thick, solid sheet metal for
outer casing and 0.55 mm thick, perforated sheet metal for inner casing.

D. Round Units: Casings with sheet metal thicknesses for diameters listed below:

1. Up to 600 mm: 0.85 mm.
2. 650 through 1000 mm: 1.0 mm.
3. 1050 through 1300 mm: 1.3 mm.
4. 1350 through 1500 mm: 1.6 mm.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock‐seam duct may be one size thinner than that indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm and designed for minimum aerodynamic
losses.

E. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3 mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.

F. Fibrous Acoustic‐Fill Material: Inert and vermin‐proof fibrous material, packed under not less
than 5 percent compression.

G. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to
system pressure variations.

1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory‐installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in
quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
H. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both directions
through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self‐noise power levels, for
both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise in
opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 10‐m/s face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or
1500‐Pastatic pressure, whichever is greater.

2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards‐‐Metal and Flexible."

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 38 mm wide, curved blades set 19 mm o.c.; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set 50 mm o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in
ducts.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil‐shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous‐glass fill.

2.8 DUCT‐MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more chrome‐plated enamel
painted steel hinges and quick fastening locking devices. Provide doors as large as practical.
Include vision panel where indicated. Include 25‐by‐25 mm butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
Access doors up to 300 X 300 mm shall have two cam locks, larger sizes shall have four cam locks.

B. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. As an alternative, removable
access doors may be used.

C. Access doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an inner and outer
door panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door shall consist of two panels spot‐
welded together which totally encapsulate insulation identical to corresponded ductwork
insulation. The inner and outer doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded handles in such a
configuration that the panels can be drawn together to secure the door to the duct in a sandwich
fashion.

D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical springs shall be used
between the door panels to facilitate installation and removal of the door. Fireproof neoprene
gasket shall be used around the outside edge of the inner or outer panel, but not both, to seal the
door.

E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat‐oval ductwork.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Flame‐retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with
UL 181, Class 1.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Standard Metal‐Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide attached
to two strips of 70 mm wide, 0.7 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8 mm aluminum sheets.
Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

C. Extra‐Wide Metal‐Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 146 mm wide
attached to two strips of 70 mm wide, 0.7 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8 mm aluminum
sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Transverse Metal‐Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide
attached to two strips of 111 mm wide, 0.7 mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8 mm aluminum
sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.
2. Tensile Strength: 84 N/mm in the warp, and 63 N/mm in the filling.

F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a
synthetic‐rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone
environment.


G. High‐Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber and
having a minimum weight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile strength of 50 N/mm in the warp, and 32
N/mm in the filling.

H. High‐Corrosive‐Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with a chemical‐
resistant coating.


2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral‐wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.
D. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory‐fabricated, insulated, round duct, comply with ASTM C 553,

Type II, with an outer jacket enclosing 38 mm thick with thermal Conductivity of 0.038W/mK at 20
deg. C (68 deg. F) mean temperature, glass‐fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per 300 mm (foot) of straight duct, at 500 Hz,
based on 150 mm (6 inch) duct, of 750 m/min (2500 fpm).

1. Reinforcement: Steel‐wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

2. Outer Jacket: Glass‐reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral fibrous‐
glass tape, and nylon hanging cord or aluminum foil.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

E. Pressure Rating: 1500 Pa positive, 125 Pa negative.

2.11 ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and length to suit duct
insulation thickness.

B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc‐plated damper blade bracket; 6 mm, zinc‐plated operating rod;
and a duct‐mounted, ball‐joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square‐head set screw.

C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless‐steel band with cadmium‐plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm‐gear action, in sizes 75 to 450 mm to suit duct size.

D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards‐‐Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards" for fibrous‐glass ducts.

B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL‐approved written instructions.

1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.

E. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.

1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,
adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
F. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual‐volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing."


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15855 ‐ DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling‐ and wall‐mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents,

whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume‐control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and
grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the ceiling
and comprising deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and
arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in
a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static‐pressure drop, and noise ratings for each
type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of
assembly of components.

Section 15855 – Diffuser Registers Grilles
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show
locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, grilles and access panels with other items
installed in ceilings and walls.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory‐applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes,
showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the
Work.


A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers,
and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems selected. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air‐Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

C. Location of ceiling mounted diffusers shall be as per coordinated ceiling drawings prepared by the
Contractor. Color and finish of diffusers shall match with approved ceiling colour and to be
submitted for Engineer’s approval..

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR‐DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION

A. Air‐diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration. Devices
shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for mounting in indicated surface
construction.

B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.

C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid. Dampers shall be
extracting‐splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.

D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal velocity is not
to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer velocities through diffuser are not to exceed
3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below room
temperature without causing objectionable conditions.

E. Air‐diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the face of the device.
Volume adjustments shall be made by removable key.

F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply‐terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.
G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage), provide sponge‐
rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.

I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air quantity, as
measured on the A‐scale of a standard noise level meter, unless specified otherwise

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are described at the end of this Section.
B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles sizes are indicated on Drawings.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the
Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling‐Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and
accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for
air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay‐in ceiling panels, locate units in the
center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify
the Engineer for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces
to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged
finishes.

3.5

3.6 DIFFUSER SCHEDULE

A. Diffuser Type SCD, RCD, SLD or PSD: < .

1. Material:Aluminum.
2. Finish: Baked enamel, color to be selected and approved by the Engineer.
3. Duct Connection: Round or Square; as indicated on drawings.
4. Face Size: as indicated on drawings.
5. Maximum Noise‐Criterion Rating: 30 NC.
6. Face Style: Round, Square, Rectangular, Panel, Perforated, flowbar linear slot, or Linear as
indicated on drawings.
7. Mounting: Lay in, Snap in.
8. Pattern: Adjustable, one way, 2 way, 3 way or 4 way.
9. Dampers: as indicated on drawings Combination volume and pattern control.
10. Accessories: Include the following as applicable:
a. Equalizer deflectors.

b. Smudge ring.
c. Plaster ring.
d. Extractor.
e. Pattern controller.
f. Blank‐off panel, end caps and mitered corners on linear diffusers.
g. Operating keys.
h. Insulated supply and return plenums for slot and linear disffusers with volume
dampers on plenum supply inlet.

B. Diffuser Type
1. Material: Heavy gauge steel
2. Finish: Baked enamel, color to be selected and approved by the engineer.
3. Duct connection: round or square as indicated on drawings.
4. Face size: As indicated on drawings.
5. Maximum noise: Criterion rating: 40NC.
6. Face style: Round or as indicated on drawings.
7. Mounting: Lay in, snap in.
8. Pattern: Adjustable ring operated for ring through operation. Airflow discharge to be
adjustable from horizontal to vertical and vice versa.
9. Damper: Ring operated.

a. Equalizer deflectors.
b. Smudge ring.
c. Plaster ring.
d. Extractor.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

e. Pattern controller.
f. Blank‐off panel, end caps and mitered corners on linear diffusers.
g. Operating keys.
h. Insulated supply and return plenums for slot and linear disffusers with volume
dampers on plenum supply inlet.
C. Jet Diffuser \ Nozzle.
1. Material: Aluminum.

2. Finish: Powder coated, color to be selected and approved by the Engineer.
3. Size: as indicated on drawings.
4. Maximum Noise‐Criterion Rating: 35 NC.
5. Face Style: Round.
6. Mounting: Front mounting flange.
7. Pattern: Adjustable, swivel deflection within +\‐ 30 degrees.
a. Insulated supply and return plenums .

3.7 REGISTER SCHEDULE

A. Supply Register Type SR

3. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal
4. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical.
5. Frame: 25 mm wide
6. Mounting: Concealed
7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed‐blade assembly
8. Accessories: Include plaster frame.
B. Return and Exhaust Register Types RR & ER

3. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal
4. Frame: 25 mm wide
5. Mounting: Concealed
6. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed‐blade assembly
7. Accessories: Include plaster frame.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

SECTION 15990 ‐ TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 ‐ GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design objectives,
including the following:

1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains, branches,
and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are

included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality‐control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment
installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to design quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air
velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from
a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.

E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

Section 15990 – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

F. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.

G. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

H. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting the
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

I. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

J. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

K. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

L. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality‐Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence, submit 2
copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality
Assurance" Article below.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Engineer's Notice to
Commence, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this
Section.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Engineer's Notice to Commence, submit
2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step‐by‐step procedures as
specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended
for use on this Project.

D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as
specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent.

E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.


A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either AABC or
NEBB, or another agency acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Employer's and the Engineer's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures
plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance
notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved testing,
adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.

D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's report
forms as approved by the Engineer.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in [AABC national standards]
[NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,"
Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification"].

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if
required by the instrument manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Employer Occupancy: The Employer may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Employer during testing, adjusting, and balancing
operations to minimize conflicts with the Employer's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory‐authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the Conditions of Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow‐
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by
the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section " Record (As‐Built) Documents."
D. Examine the Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies
and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems‐‐Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been
performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such
as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow‐control devices, balancing valves and fittings,
and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible and
appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine air‐handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.

L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

M. Examine valves for proper installation for their intended function.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

N. Examine heat‐transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

O. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
P. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed
and fully open positions.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2‐way valves and 3‐way mixing and
diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.

Q. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step‐by‐step
procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature‐control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air‐pattern adjustments are required and access
to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems‐‐Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

C. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including
damper‐control positions, valve indicators, fan‐speed‐control levers, and similar controls and
devices, to show final settings.

3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as‐built" duct layou

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

D. Check the airflow patterns from the outside‐air louvers and dampers and the return‐ and exhaust‐
air dampers, through the supply‐fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start‐stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air‐handling unit components.

3.5 CONSTANT‐VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant‐volume supply‐, return‐, and exhaust‐air systems.
Additional procedures are required for variable‐air‐volume, multizone, dual‐duct, induction‐unit
supply‐air systems and process exhaust‐air systems. These additional procedures are specified in
other articles in this Section.

B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single‐inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double‐inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air‐handling unit component.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective
action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Engineer. Make
required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan‐speed changes.
6. Do not make fan‐speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan‐speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan‐motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design airflows
within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot‐tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust
submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct‐reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.

E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances of
design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers
at the air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract
Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch‐circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as‐built" piping layouts.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup‐water‐station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow‐control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.
5. Set differential‐pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive‐displacement type, unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so that automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump‐motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow‐balancing device so
that motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive‐displacement
pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with the
pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across the
pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the
point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the
intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump
and mark the pump manufacturer's head‐capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until
design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump‐motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow‐pressure‐drop
relationship may be used as a flow‐indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than design flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor‐air temperature.

Measure the differential‐pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.
MOTORS
G. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high‐efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal‐protection‐element rating.

3.8 CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator to within specified tolerances of design flow with all
pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed
the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and
record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
.
2. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by the chiller manufacturer.
3. Power factor if factory‐installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW.
4. The kW input if factory‐installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kW.
5. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.

3.9 CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering‐ and leaving‐air temperatures. Record
compressor data.

3.10 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation
within the automatic temperature‐control system.

B. Measure indoor wet‐ and dry‐bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8‐
hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings.
Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside‐air, wet‐ and dry‐bulb temperatures.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

3.11 TEMPERATURE‐CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control
functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high‐ and low‐temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water‐flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I. Verify main control supply‐air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a
grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail‐safe operations.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Cooling‐Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.13 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction‐Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified
in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing
devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper
performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and
general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.14 FINAL REPORT

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter‐quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3‐
ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
9. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

10. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
11. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
12. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
13. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:

a. Settings for outside‐, return‐, and exhaust‐air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet‐ and dry‐bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable‐air‐volume systems.
g. Settings for supply‐air, static‐pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
with single‐line diagrams and include the following:

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.

F. Air‐Handling Unit Test Reports: For air‐handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center‐to‐center and amount of adjustments in mm.
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full‐load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center‐to‐center and amount of adjustments in mm.

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in L/s.
b. Total system static pressure in Pa.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa.
e. Filter static‐pressure differential in Pa.
f. Cooling coil static‐pressure differential in Pa.
g. Heating coil static‐pressure differential in Pa.
h. Outside airflow in L/s.
i. Return airflow in L/s.
j. Outside‐air damper position.
k. Return‐air damper position.
l. Vortex damper position.

G. Apparatus‐Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following:

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c..
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m.
h. Tube size in DN.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in L/s.
b. Average face velocity in m/s.
c. Air pressure drop in Pa.
d. Outside‐air, wet‐ and dry‐bulb temperatures in deg. C.
e. Return‐air, wet‐ and dry‐bulb temperatures in deg. C.
f. Entering‐air, wet‐ and dry‐bulb temperatures in deg. C.
g. Leaving‐air, wet‐ and dry‐bulb temperatures in deg. C.
h. Water flow rate in L/s.
i. Water pressure differential in kPa.
j. Entering‐water temperature in deg. C.
k. Leaving‐water temperature in deg. C.
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa.
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg. C.
o. Inlet steam pressure in kPa.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center‐to‐center and amount of adjustments in mm.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full‐load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm , and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center‐to‐center and amount of adjustments in mm.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358


a. Total airflow rate in L/s.
b. Total system static pressure in Pa.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa.
e. Suction static pressure in Pa.

I. Round, Flat‐Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross‐section and record the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. System and air‐handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg. C.
d. Duct static pressure in Pa.
e. Duct size in mm.
f. Duct area in sq. m.
g. Design airflow rate in L/s.
h. Design velocity in m/s.
i. Actual airflow rate in L/s.
j. Actual average velocity in m/s.
k. Barometric pressure in Pa.

J. Packaged Chiller Reports: For each chiller, include the following:


b. Make and model number.
c. Manufacturer's serial number.
d. Refrigerant type and capacity in L.
e. Starter type and size.
f. Starter thermal protection size.
g. .

2. Evaporator Test Reports: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Refrigerant pressure in kPa.
b. Refrigerant temperature in deg. C.
c. Entering‐water temperature in deg. C.
d. Leaving‐water temperature in deg. C.
e. Entering‐water pressure in kPa.
f. Water pressure differential in kPa.

3. Compressor Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Make and model number.
b. Manufacturer's serial number.
c. Suction pressure in kPa.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

d. Suction temperature in deg. C.
e. Discharge pressure in kPa.
f. Discharge temperature in deg. C.
g. Oil pressure in kPa.
h. Oil temperature in deg. C.
i. Voltage at each connection.
j. Amperage for each phase.
k. The kW input.
l. Crankcase heater kW.
m. Chilled water control set point in deg. C.
n. Condenser water control set point in deg. C.
o. Refrigerant low‐pressure‐cutoff set point in kPa.
p. Refrigerant high‐pressure‐cutoff set point in kPa.

4. Refrigerant Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Oil level.
b. Refrigerant level.
c. Relief valve setting in kPa.
d. Unloader set points in kPa.
e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded.
f. Bearing temperatures in deg. C.
g. Vane position.
h. Low‐temperature‐cutoff set point in deg. C.

K. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand‐alone
refrigerant compressors, air‐cooled condensing units, or water‐cooled condensing units, include
the following:


b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in kg.
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg. C.


a. Inlet‐duct static pressure in Pa.
b. Outlet‐duct static pressure in Pa.
c. Entering‐air, dry‐bulb temperature in deg. C.
d. Leaving‐air, dry‐bulb temperature in deg. C.
e. Control settings.
f. Unloader set points.
g. Low‐pressure‐cutout set point in kPa.
h. High‐pressure‐cutout set point in kPa.
i. Suction pressure in kPa.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

j. Suction temperature in deg. C.
k. Condenser refrigerant pressure in kPa.
l. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg. C.
m. Oil pressure in kPa.
n. Oil temperature in deg. C.
o. Voltage at each connection.
p. Amperage for each phase.
q. The kW input.
r. Crankcase heater kW.
s. Number of fans.
t. Condenser fan rpm.
u. Condenser fan airflow rate in L/s.
v. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
w. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.
x. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

3. Pump Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Make and model number.
b. Manufacturer's serial number.
c. Motor make and frame size.
d. Motor horsepower and rpm.
e. Voltage at each connection.
f. Amperage for each phase.
g. Water flow rate in L/s .

4. Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Entering‐water temperature in deg. C.
b. Leaving‐water temperature in deg. C.
c. Water temperature differential in deg. C.
d. Entering‐water pressure in kPa.
e. Leaving‐water pressure in kPa.
f. Water pressure differential in kPa.
g. Water flow rate in L/s.
h. Bleed water flow rate in L/s.

5. Air Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Duct airflow rate in L/s.
b. Inlet‐duct static pressure in Pa.
c. Outlet‐duct static pressure in Pa.
d. Average entering‐air, wet‐bulb temperature in deg. C.
e. Average leaving‐air, wet‐bulb temperature in deg. C.
f. Ambient wet‐bulb temperature in deg. C.

L. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by plotting the
shutoff head on pump curves.


JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358

b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in L/s.
g. Water pressure differential in kPa.
h. Required net positive suction head in kPa.
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in mm.
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full‐load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.


a. Static head in kPa.
b. Pump shutoff pressure in kPa.
c. Actual impeller size in mm.
d. Full‐open flow rate in L/s.
e. Full‐open pressure in kPa.
f. Final discharge pressure in kPa.
g. Final suction pressure in kPa.
h. Final total pressure in kPa.
i. Final water flow rate in L/s.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.

M. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.

3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct
unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near‐peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near‐peak summer and winter conditions.

JVC11BBMRA005 681‐1358



Electrical MEP Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical MEP Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical MEP Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CH C

ACES PROPERTY LIMITED

16000 SCOPE AND EXTENT OF WORKS

File: ELECSPEC16000.doc Page 1 of 1

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

SCOPE AND EXTENT OF WORKS

File: ELECSPEC16000.doc Page 1 of 3

File: ELECSPEC16000.doc Page 2 of 3

END OF SECTION 16000

File: ELECSPEC16000.doc Page 3 of 3

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 1 of 8

2. STANDARDS AND CODES

a) Dubai Electricity and Water Authority (DEWA) Wiring Regulations.

a) Maximum ambient temperature : 55 degrees C (to be reviewed).

4. ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND SERVICE CONDITIONS

Voltage : 380V +/- 5%, 3 phase, 4-wire

Neutral : solidly earthed, TNT system

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 2 of 8

5. STATUTORY APPROVALS, FEES AND INSPECTION

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 3 of 8

7. TENDER DRAWINGS AND POSITIONS OF FITTINGS.

7.1. Approximate locations of various items of electrical equipment inclusive of

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 4 of 8

9. WORKING AND “AS FITTED “ DRAWINGS AND OPERATING MAUALS

i) General arrangement of all electrical services “ AS FITTED”, to scale

10. PERSONNEL TRAINING

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 5 of 8

11. ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

11.1. As a guide to the quality of workmanship required, names of three

12. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 6 of 8

13. ELECTRICAL TESTS.

i) Insulation resistance tests between conductors, and between conductors

14. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING.

16. SPARE PARTS.

In accordance with respective manufacturer’s recommendations, the contractor shall

In each electrical room the following Notices relating to important instructions

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 7 of 8

18. LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION MARKS.

19. NOTES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS.

19.1. Each Final MCB Distribution Board shall be sectionalized as indicated in

END OF SECTION 16010

File: ELECSPEC16010.doc Page 8 of 8

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS FOR WIRING AND CABLING

CONDUITS, TRUNKING, TRAYS, LADDERS, DUCTS AND UNDER

2. INSTRUCTIONS AND GUIDELINES FOR CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS

2.1. No conduits of diameter smaller than 20 mm shall be used.

File: ELECSPEC16110.doc Page 1 of 8

File: ELECSPEC16110.doc Page 2 of 8

3. PVC CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

4. GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES.

File: ELECSPEC16110.doc Page 3 of 8

5. PVC TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS

File: ELECSPEC16110.doc Page 4 of 8

6. GALVANIZED STEEL TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS

File: ELECSPEC16110.doc Page 5 of 8

File: ELECSPEC16110.doc Page 6 of 8